04.06.2015 Views

Trendsetter Console 2.0 Configuration Guide - Kodak

Trendsetter Console 2.0 Configuration Guide - Kodak

Trendsetter Console 2.0 Configuration Guide - Kodak

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.

<strong>Configuration</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

version <strong>2.0</strong><br />

www.creoscitex.com<br />

03-4146B-A


<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

version <strong>2.0</strong><br />

<strong>Configuration</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Copyright<br />

Copyright © 2001 Creo Products Inc. All rights reserved.<br />

CreoScitex is a major operating division of Creo Products Inc.<br />

No copying, distribution, publication, modification, or incorporation of this document, in whole or part, is<br />

permitted without the express written permission of CreoScitex. In the event of any permitted copying,<br />

distribution, publication, modification, or incorporation of this document, no changes in or deletion of author<br />

attribution, trademark legend, or copyright notice shall be made.<br />

The text and drawings herein are for illustration and reference only. The specifications on which they are based<br />

are subject to change. Creo Products Inc. may, at any time and without notice, make changes to this document.<br />

Creo Products Inc., for itself and on behalf of its subsidiaries, assumes no liability for technical or editorial errors<br />

or omissions made herein, and shall not be liable for incidental, consequential, indirect, or special damages,<br />

including, without limitation, loss of use, loss or alteration of data, delays, or lost profits or savings arising from<br />

the use of this document.<br />

No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, published, used for commercial<br />

exploitation, or transmitted, in any form by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or<br />

otherwise, without the express written permission of Creo Products Inc.<br />

This document is also distributed in Adobe Systems Incorporated's PDF (Portable Document Format). You may<br />

reproduce the document from the PDF file for internal use. Copies produced from the PDF file must be<br />

reproduced in whole.<br />

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<br />

Trademarks<br />

The CreoScitex script, the CreoScitex swooshes logo, and the names of the CreoScitex products and services<br />

referred to in this document are trademarks of Creo Products Inc.<br />

Acrobat, the Acrobat logo, Adobe, Adobe Font Downloader, Adobe Illustrator, Adobe Photoshop, PDF, and<br />

PostScript are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.<br />

Apple, AppleTalk, AppleShare, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, Macintosh, and Laserwriter are trademarks of Apple<br />

Computer Inc.<br />

Microsoft, Microsoft Windows NT, Microsoft Windows 2000, and Windows are trademarks or registered<br />

trademarks of Microsoft Corp.<br />

Xerox is a registered trademark of Xerox Corp.<br />

Other brand or product names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.<br />

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<br />

FCC Compliance<br />

The CreoScitex equipment referred to in this document complies with the requirements in Part 15 of FCC Rules<br />

for a Class A computing device. Operation of the CreoScitex equipment in a residential area may cause<br />

unacceptable interference to radio and TV reception, requiring the operator to take whatever steps are necessary<br />

to correct the interference.<br />

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Limitation of Liability<br />

The product, software or services are being provided on an “as is” and “as available” basis. Except as may be stated<br />

specifically in your contract, Creo Products Inc. and CreoScitex (jointly referred to as “Creo”) expressly disclaim<br />

all warranties of any kind, whether express or implied, including, but not limited to, any implied warranties of<br />

merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose and non-infringement.<br />

You understand and agree that Creo Products Inc. or CreoScitex (jointly referred to as “Creo”) shall not be liable<br />

for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, consequential or exemplary damages, including but not limited to,<br />

damages for loss of profits, goodwill, use, data or other intangible losses (even if Creo has been advised of the<br />

possibility of such damages), resulting from: (i) the use or the inability to use the product or software; (ii) the cost<br />

of procurement of substitute goods and services resulting from any products, goods, data, software, information<br />

or services purchased; (iii) unauthorized access to or alteration of your products, software or data; (iv) statements<br />

or conduct of any third party; (v) any other matter relating to the product, software, or services.<br />

.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<br />

Patents<br />

This product is covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents:<br />

4456924<br />

4500919<br />

4558302<br />

5049901<br />

5079721<br />

5103407<br />

5111308<br />

5113249<br />

5122871<br />

5124547<br />

5132723<br />

5150225<br />

5153769<br />

5155782<br />

5157516<br />

5208818<br />

5208888<br />

5247174<br />

5247352<br />

5283140<br />

5291273<br />

5296935<br />

5313278<br />

5323248<br />

5325217<br />

5331439<br />

5333064<br />

5339176<br />

5355446<br />

5359451<br />

5359458<br />

5367360<br />

5367388<br />

5384648<br />

5384899<br />

5412491<br />

5412737<br />

5420702<br />

5420722<br />

5459505<br />

5473733<br />

5481379<br />

5488906<br />

5497252<br />

5508828<br />

5509561<br />

5517359<br />

5519852<br />

5526143<br />

5532728<br />

5561691<br />

5568595<br />

5576754<br />

5579115<br />

5592309<br />

5594556<br />

5600448<br />

5608822<br />

5615282<br />

5625766<br />

5636330<br />

5649220<br />

5650076<br />

5652804<br />

5691823<br />

5691828<br />

5699174<br />

5699740<br />

5708736<br />

5713287<br />

5739819<br />

5742743<br />

5764381<br />

5771794<br />

5785309<br />

5813346<br />

5818498<br />

5854883<br />

5861904<br />

5861992<br />

5864651<br />

5875288<br />

5894342<br />

5900981<br />

5934196<br />

5942137<br />

5946426<br />

5947028<br />

5958647<br />

5966504<br />

5969872<br />

5973801<br />

5986819<br />

5995475<br />

5996499<br />

5998067<br />

6003442<br />

6014471<br />

6016752<br />

6031932<br />

6043865<br />

6060208<br />

6063528<br />

6063546<br />

6072518<br />

6090529<br />

6096461<br />

6098544<br />

6107011<br />

6112663<br />

6115056<br />

6121996<br />

6130702<br />

6134393<br />

6136509<br />

6147789<br />

6158345<br />

6159659<br />

6164637<br />

.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<br />

Creo Products Inc.<br />

3700 Gilmore Way<br />

Burnaby, B.C., Canada<br />

V5G 4M1<br />

Tel: (1) (604) 451-2700<br />

Fax: (1) (604) 437-9891<br />

http://www.creo.com<br />

.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<br />

03-4146B-A<br />

Revised June 2001


Contents<br />

Using This Manual<br />

Who Should Use This Manual .................................................................................................................. xii<br />

What’s New in This Manual ..................................................................................................................... xii<br />

New Features in <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Version <strong>2.0</strong>. ................................................................................... xii<br />

Changes to This Manual .................................................................................................................. xiii<br />

Conventions Used in This Manual ........................................................................................................... xiii<br />

Fonts ............................................................................................................................................... xiii<br />

Terminology .................................................................................................................................... xiii<br />

Symbols........................................................................................................................................... xiv<br />

Software Symbols Legend................................................................................................................. xv<br />

PDF Document ....................................................................................................................................... xvi<br />

1 <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Overview 1<br />

What Is <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>? ................................................................................................................... 2<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Components............................................................................................................. 2<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> and Allegro RIP .................................................................................................. 3<br />

Harmony ........................................................................................................................................... 3<br />

Allegro Workstation........................................................................................................................... 4<br />

Output Device ................................................................................................................................... 4<br />

Software Supported by <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> ............................................................................................. 5<br />

PrintLink ............................................................................................................................................ 5<br />

Staccato ............................................................................................................................................ 6<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Terminology ............................................................................................................. 7<br />

2 Getting Started 9<br />

Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 10<br />

Installing <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>................................................................................................................. 10<br />

Starting <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> .................................................................................................................. 10<br />

Exiting <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> .................................................................................................................... 11<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Menus .................................................................................................................... 12<br />

Allegro RIP Menu............................................................................................................................. 13<br />

Edit Menu........................................................................................................................................ 16<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> Menu ............................................................................................................................ 16<br />

Color Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 20<br />

Output Menu .................................................................................................................................. 20<br />

Fonts Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 21<br />

Input Queue Menu .......................................................................................................................... 22<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Toolbar................................................................................................................... 23<br />

xi


vi<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> <strong>Configuration</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

3 <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts 27<br />

Overview................................................................................................................................................ 28<br />

PostScript File Types ............................................................................................................................... 28<br />

Media Types........................................................................................................................................... 29<br />

What Is a Media Type? .................................................................................................................... 29<br />

How Are Media Types Used? ........................................................................................................... 29<br />

Proof Types and Plate Types ................................................................................................................... 31<br />

What Are Proof Types and Plate Types? ........................................................................................... 31<br />

How Are Proof Types and Plate Types Used?..................................................................................... 31<br />

How Do Proof Types and Plate Types Relate to PPD Files? ................................................................ 31<br />

Separation Styles .................................................................................................................................... 32<br />

What Is a Separation Style? ............................................................................................................. 32<br />

How Are Separation Styles Used? .................................................................................................... 35<br />

Page Setups ........................................................................................................................................... 36<br />

What Is a Page Setup?..................................................................................................................... 36<br />

How Are Page Setups Used?............................................................................................................ 37<br />

Page Setup Overrides ...................................................................................................................... 37<br />

Page Features......................................................................................................................................... 40<br />

What Are Page Features? ................................................................................................................ 40<br />

How Are Page Features Used? ......................................................................................................... 41<br />

What Is the Spectrum.ps Proofing Page Feature? ............................................................................. 41<br />

What Is the RIPToHeldQueue.ps Proofing Page Feature? .................................................................. 42<br />

What Are the ProofCrop Proofing Page Features?............................................................................ 43<br />

Medium Index ........................................................................................................................................ 44<br />

What Is a Medium Index Number?................................................................................................... 44<br />

How Is a Medium Index Number Used? ........................................................................................... 44<br />

How Do I Add Medium Index Numbers to PostScript Files? .............................................................. 46<br />

How Is the OverMediumIndex.ps Page Feature Used? ...................................................................... 47<br />

How Are Medium Index Numbers Related to PPD Files? ................................................................... 47<br />

Proof Color Mapping Table Spectrum Devices ........................................................................................ 48<br />

What Is a Proof Color Mapping Table? ............................................................................................ 48<br />

How Is the Proof Color Mapping Table Used?.................................................................................. 50<br />

Why Is the Proof Color Mapping Table Needed?.............................................................................. 50<br />

RIP-to-Disk and RIP-to-Plate Modes......................................................................................................... 52<br />

What Is RIP-to-Disk Mode? .............................................................................................................. 52<br />

What Is RIP-to-Plate Mode? ............................................................................................................. 54<br />

RIP-to-Disk and RIP-to-Plate Modes Compared................................................................................. 55<br />

Possible Time Advantages for Each Mode ........................................................................................ 56<br />

Key Differences Between Modes...................................................................................................... 56<br />

Input Channels....................................................................................................................................... 57<br />

What Is an Input Channel? .............................................................................................................. 57<br />

How Are Input Channels Used? ....................................................................................................... 58<br />

How Are Input Channels Managed? ................................................................................................ 58<br />

What Is Start Inputs? ....................................................................................................................... 59<br />

Device-specific PPD Files ......................................................................................................................... 61<br />

What Is the PPD File?....................................................................................................................... 61


Contents<br />

vii<br />

How Are PPD Files Used? ................................................................................................................. 62<br />

How Are PPD Files Used With Desktop Applications? ....................................................................... 63<br />

When Should I Generate the PPD File?............................................................................................. 65<br />

Output Controller/Monitor Window ....................................................................................................... 66<br />

What Is the Output Controller/Monitor Window? ............................................................................ 66<br />

How Is the Output Controller/Monitor Window Used?..................................................................... 66<br />

Allegro Window ..................................................................................................................................... 68<br />

What Is the Allegro Window? .......................................................................................................... 68<br />

How Is the Allegro Window Used?................................................................................................... 68<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor Window ................................................................................................................. 69<br />

What Is the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor Window? ...................................................................................... 69<br />

How Is the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor Window Used?............................................................................... 69<br />

4 <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Reference 71<br />

Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 72<br />

<strong>Configuration</strong> Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................... 73<br />

Buttons Available............................................................................................................................. 74<br />

Media <strong>Configuration</strong> Dialog Box............................................................................................................. 75<br />

Buttons Available............................................................................................................................. 75<br />

Plate Definition Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... 76<br />

Buttons Available............................................................................................................................. 76<br />

Plate Type Specifications Dialog Box................................................................................................. 77<br />

Proof Definition Dialog Box..................................................................................................................... 79<br />

Buttons Available............................................................................................................................. 79<br />

Proof Type Specifications Dialog Box................................................................................................ 80<br />

Orientation for Four-Up Layouts for the Four-Up Cassette................................................................ 82<br />

Orientation for Eight-Up Layouts for the Eight-Up Cassette.............................................................. 82<br />

Configure Proof Color Mappings Dialog Box........................................................................................... 84<br />

Buttons Available............................................................................................................................. 85<br />

Save PPD File Dialog Box......................................................................................................................... 86<br />

Buttons Available............................................................................................................................. 86<br />

Configure PPD Dialog Box................................................................................................................ 87<br />

Basic Options................................................................................................................................... 92<br />

Spot Function Selection Section ....................................................................................................... 92<br />

Buttons Available............................................................................................................................. 94<br />

Spool Folder <strong>Configuration</strong> Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 94<br />

5 System <strong>Configuration</strong> 99<br />

Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 100<br />

Selecting an Output Device................................................................................................................... 101<br />

Configuring the Allegro Workstation .................................................................................................... 102<br />

Selecting the Unit of Measurement................................................................................................ 102<br />

Adding Medium Index Numbers to PPD Files.................................................................................. 103<br />

Configuring Manual Proof/Plate Selection ...................................................................................... 103<br />

Configuring Manual Proof Eject ..................................................................................................... 104


viii<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> <strong>Configuration</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Licensing PrintLink (Optional)......................................................................................................... 104<br />

Licensing Staccato (Optional) ......................................................................................................... 105<br />

Configuring Media Types ..................................................................................................................... 105<br />

Configuring Plate Types........................................................................................................................ 107<br />

Adding Plate Types ........................................................................................................................ 107<br />

Modifying Plate Type Information .................................................................................................. 108<br />

Adding Custom Medium Index to Plate Types................................................................................ 109<br />

Deleting Plate Types ...................................................................................................................... 111<br />

Configuring Proof Types....................................................................................................................... 112<br />

Adding Proof Types ....................................................................................................................... 112<br />

Modifying Proof Type Information ................................................................................................. 114<br />

Adding Custom Medium Index to Proof Types ............................................................................... 114<br />

Deleting Proof Types...................................................................................................................... 116<br />

Configuring Proof Color Mappings....................................................................................................... 117<br />

Loading or Reloading Default Color Mappings............................................................................... 117<br />

Adding a New Color Mapping ....................................................................................................... 118<br />

Editing a Color Mapping................................................................................................................ 120<br />

Deleting a Color Mapping ............................................................................................................. 121<br />

Configuring Allegro RIP ........................................................................................................................ 122<br />

Configuring a Data Storage Threshold ........................................................................................... 122<br />

Changing the Storage Location for RIP-to-Disk .............................................................................. 124<br />

Configuring the RIP Mode ............................................................................................................. 125<br />

Configuring Fonts ................................................................................................................................ 127<br />

Installing a Font ............................................................................................................................. 127<br />

Listing Installed Fonts..................................................................................................................... 128<br />

Deleting a Font.............................................................................................................................. 129<br />

Configuring PPD and PPX Files.............................................................................................................. 130<br />

Generating Device-specific PPD Files .............................................................................................. 131<br />

Loading the Default PPD File Settings............................................................................................. 131<br />

Creating New Screening Settings................................................................................................... 132<br />

Editing Screening Settings ............................................................................................................. 134<br />

Deleting Screening Settings ........................................................................................................... 135<br />

Setting Up Custom Screening Angles............................................................................................. 136<br />

Using Page Features ...................................................................................................................... 136<br />

Including Spot Functions................................................................................................................ 137<br />

Removing Spot Functions .............................................................................................................. 137<br />

Viewing Spot Function Code ......................................................................................................... 138<br />

Adding Custom Spot Functions ..................................................................................................... 139<br />

Adding a Custom Spot Function to Allegro RIP .............................................................................. 140<br />

Deleting Custom Spot Functions.................................................................................................... 142<br />

Making PPD and PPX Files Available to Your Imposition Software .................................................. 143<br />

Reparsing the PPD File in Preps ...................................................................................................... 146<br />

Determining Which Output Device the PPD File Is For .................................................................... 146<br />

Setting Default Allegro RIP Settings in Desktop Publishing Applications.......................................... 148<br />

Configuring Page Features ................................................................................................................... 149<br />

Creating a Page Feature ................................................................................................................ 149<br />

Modifying the Spectrum.ps Proofing Page Feature......................................................................... 150


Contents<br />

ix<br />

Enabling a Page Feature................................................................................................................. 150<br />

6 Job <strong>Configuration</strong> 151<br />

Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 152<br />

Configuring Separation Styles............................................................................................................... 153<br />

Managing Separation Styles.................................................................................................................. 154<br />

Separations Manager Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 154<br />

Edit Style Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................... 156<br />

New Style Dialog Box..................................................................................................................... 161<br />

Creating a New Separation Style.................................................................................................... 162<br />

Editing a Separation Style .............................................................................................................. 167<br />

Copying a Separation Style ............................................................................................................ 169<br />

Deleting a Separation Style ............................................................................................................ 171<br />

Controlling Separation Output....................................................................................................... 172<br />

Creating Separation Styles for Specific Workflows ................................................................................ 183<br />

Separation Style Settings for Common Workflows ......................................................................... 184<br />

Creating a Separation Style for Separated Workflows .................................................................... 185<br />

Creating a Separation Style for Composite CMYK Workflows ........................................................ 189<br />

Creating a Separation Style for Rejecting Pre-separated Files<br />

Submitted Using Composite Page Setups....................................................................................... 194<br />

Creating a Separation Style for Pre-separated Workflows............................................................... 194<br />

Creating a Separation Style for Recombining a Pre-separated Workflow ........................................ 199<br />

Managing Page Setups ......................................................................................................................... 203<br />

Page Setup Manager Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 203<br />

Edit Page Setup and New Page Setup Dialog Boxes........................................................................ 205<br />

Page Setup Options Dialog Box...................................................................................................... 211<br />

Naming Page Setups...................................................................................................................... 212<br />

Default Page Setups....................................................................................................................... 213<br />

Creating a Page Setup ................................................................................................................... 214<br />

Editing a Page Setup...................................................................................................................... 216<br />

Copying a Page Setup.................................................................................................................... 218<br />

Deleting a Page Setup.................................................................................................................... 220<br />

Changing the Page Setup Order .................................................................................................... 221<br />

Configuring a Page Setup .............................................................................................................. 222<br />

Configuring Inputs ............................................................................................................................... 240<br />

Creating an Input .......................................................................................................................... 240<br />

Editing an Input ............................................................................................................................. 242<br />

Copying an Input........................................................................................................................... 243<br />

Deleting an Input........................................................................................................................... 245<br />

Turning an Input On or Off ............................................................................................................ 245<br />

Glossary 247<br />

Index 253


x<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> <strong>Configuration</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


Using This Manual<br />

Who Should Use This Manual ........................................................... xii<br />

What’s New in This Manual............................................................... xii<br />

Conventions Used in This Manual .....................................................xiii<br />

PDF Document..................................................................................xvi


xii<br />

Using This Manual<br />

Who Should Use This Manual<br />

What’s New in This Manual<br />

This manual is intended for anyone who is involved in configuring <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong>. It explains the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> menus, concepts, and dialog box<br />

options, as well as how to configure the system and jobs. To use this manual, you<br />

should:<br />

• have a working knowledge of prepress operations<br />

• be familiar with the Windows operating system<br />

• be familiar with the Macintosh operating system<br />

This manual assumes that:<br />

• All the hardware, software, and network components of your<br />

CreoScitex system are installed, configured, and operating correctly.<br />

• Files submitted to the CreoScitex system are free of common errors<br />

usually resolved during preflight, such as missing fonts and PostScript<br />

errors.<br />

This is a new manual for <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>. It describes how to<br />

configure <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>. You also received a <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> User<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>, which describes how to use the software after you’ve configured it.<br />

New Features in <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Version <strong>2.0</strong>.<br />

• Harmony—a tonal calibration tool—is provided with <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong>. You access Harmony from the Tools menu.<br />

For details on using Harmony, see your Harmony Reference <strong>Guide</strong> for<br />

iMPAct Workflow and Harmony User <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

• Allegro RIP 5.1 support was added. This manual provides basic Allegro<br />

RIP information.<br />

For information not included in this manual, see the Allegro RIP Reference<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>.


Conventions Used in This Manual<br />

xiii<br />

Changes to This Manual<br />

• The software was renamed <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> (formerly called<br />

Allegro Workstation)<br />

• Allegro RIP information was updated to version 5.1.<br />

Conventions Used in This Manual<br />

This section describes the fonts, terminology, and symbols used in this<br />

manual.<br />

Fonts<br />

Frutiger bold is used to refer to buttons and other items in a dialog box, file<br />

names, folders, menu names, and menu commands.<br />

Minion Italic is used to refer to other chapters in the manual, book titles,<br />

and titles of other manuals.<br />

Frutiger is used for figure and table captions.<br />

Letter Gothic is used for messages on your computer screen and for<br />

information that you must type.<br />

SMALL CAPS is used for a key or key combination on your keyboard.<br />

Terminology<br />

Clear<br />

Click<br />

Double-click<br />

Place the mouse pointer over the check box for the<br />

specified option, and click the left mouse button so<br />

that the X or check mark is removed from the check<br />

box.<br />

Place the mouse pointer over the specified option or<br />

button and press and release the left mouse button.<br />

Place the mouse pointer over the specified option or<br />

button and quickly press and release the left mouse<br />

button twice.


xiv<br />

Using This Manual<br />

Drag<br />

Enter<br />

Point<br />

Press<br />

Right-click<br />

Select<br />

Type<br />

Hold down the left mouse button while moving the<br />

mouse and release the button.<br />

Type the information and press the ENTER or RETURN<br />

key.<br />

Position the mouse pointer over a submenu or menu<br />

command. For example, point to the File menu.<br />

Press the specified key or key combination on your<br />

keyboard, for example, press CTRL+ALT+DEL.<br />

Place the mouse pointer over an area of the application<br />

window, and then press and release the right mouse<br />

button to display the shortcut menu. For more<br />

information about using shortcut menus, see your<br />

Windows documentation.<br />

Place the mouse pointer over the check box for the<br />

specified option, then click the left mouse button so<br />

that an X or check mark appears in the check box.<br />

Or:<br />

Place the mouse pointer over the specified box or<br />

button, and then click the left mouse button.<br />

Type the information. Do not press the ENTER or<br />

RETURN key.<br />

Symbols<br />

Attention: This symbol alerts you to things that may cause loss of data or<br />

damage to your computer hardware.<br />

Note: A note provides additional information that you may need to consider.<br />

Important: This symbol tells you about things that may cause process delays<br />

or reduce functionality, reliability, or quality.


Conventions Used in This Manual<br />

xv<br />

Tip: This symbol draws attention to information that can help you perform a<br />

task more quickly or easily.<br />

The reference symbol tells you that related information on the topic is available<br />

in another CreoScitex document.<br />

Software Symbols Legend<br />

Legend<br />

fat, unimposed,<br />

composite<br />

PostScript file<br />

file<br />

chunky, unimposed,<br />

composite<br />

PostScript file<br />

thin, unimposed,<br />

composite<br />

PostScript file<br />

K<br />

Y<br />

M<br />

C<br />

fat, unimposed,<br />

separated<br />

PostScript file<br />

HiRes<br />

image<br />

file<br />

FPO<br />

image<br />

file<br />

folder<br />

workstation<br />

server<br />

K<br />

Y<br />

M<br />

C<br />

chunky, unimposed,<br />

separated<br />

PostScript file<br />

hot folder<br />

laser printer<br />

K<br />

Y<br />

M<br />

C<br />

thin, unimposed,<br />

separated<br />

PostScript file<br />

system operation<br />

K<br />

Y<br />

M<br />

C<br />

fat, imposed,<br />

separated<br />

PostScript file<br />

user operation<br />

user initiated<br />

platesetter<br />

K<br />

Y<br />

M<br />

C<br />

chunky, imposed,<br />

separated<br />

PostScript file<br />

Application<br />

system initiated<br />

application<br />

K<br />

Y<br />

M<br />

C<br />

thin, imposed,<br />

separated<br />

PostScript file<br />

archive<br />

color<br />

proofer


xvi<br />

Using This Manual<br />

PDF Document<br />

This manual is also provided in PDF (Portable Document Format).<br />

The PDF document can be used for online viewing and printing using<br />

Adobe Acrobat Reader. When printing the manual, please print the entire<br />

manual, including the copyright and disclaimer statements.


1<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong><br />

Overview<br />

What Is <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>?..............................................................2<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Components .......................................................2<br />

Software Supported by <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> ........................................5<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Terminology.........................................................7


2 Chapter 1 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Overview<br />

What Is <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>?<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> is software that RIPs and calibrates PostScript files for<br />

imaging on a <strong>Trendsetter</strong> output device. <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> also controls<br />

the imaging process.<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> includes Allegro RIP software for RIPing PostScript<br />

files and Harmony software for calibrating files.<br />

You submit PostScript files to <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>; Allegro RIP interprets<br />

the PostScript files, then RIPs them. Allegro RIP uses Harmony calibration<br />

curves during RIPing to calibrate the files. The result is RIPed, calibrated<br />

files, which are imaged on media via a <strong>Trendsetter</strong> output device.<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Components<br />

Your <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> system consists of:<br />

• <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

• Allegro RIP<br />

• Harmony<br />

• Allegro workstation<br />

• output device from the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> family<br />

This manual contains information about <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> and Allegro<br />

RIP and, to a limited degree, the workstation.<br />

For detailed information about operating your output device and working with<br />

media, see your device documentation. The Allegro RIP Reference <strong>Guide</strong><br />

describes Allegro RIP in detail. The Harmony User <strong>Guide</strong> and Harmony Reference<br />

<strong>Guide</strong> for iMPAct Workflow describe Harmony in detail.


<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Components 3<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> and Allegro RIP<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> includes Allegro RIP, which is raster image processor<br />

(RIP) software. It translates PostScript files into raster files that can be<br />

imaged by a <strong>Trendsetter</strong> output device. Allegro RIP creates raster images<br />

from PostScript files. Once created, the raster images are sent to the output<br />

device for imaging onto media.<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> contains the Output Controller/Monitor (in RIP-todisk<br />

mode only), <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor (message log), and Allegro<br />

windows. These windows usually display by default when you start the<br />

software.<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> and Allegro RIP run on the Allegro workstation.<br />

Harmony<br />

Harmony is a software application that you use to create calibration<br />

curves, which control tone reproduction. It runs on the Allegro<br />

workstation. Allegro RIP applies Harmony calibration curves to files<br />

during RIPing.<br />

Allegro RIP selects a Harmony calibration curve based on the following:<br />

Harmony is a software application used to create calibration curves, which<br />

control tone reproduction. Allegro RIP applies Harmony calibration<br />

curves to files during RIPing.<br />

Allegro RIP selects Harmony calibration curves based on:<br />

• medium index<br />

• screening parameters such as dpi, lpi, spot functions, or color<br />

Note: Calibration curves do not necessarily specify all screening parameters or a<br />

medium index.<br />

Allegro RIP interprets a job file to locate PostScript instructions for RIPing<br />

the file, and uses the screening attributes in the file and the medium index<br />

to select the appropriate Harmony calibration curve. Allegro RIP can also<br />

use a custom medium index number (that you define) to select a specific<br />

Harmony calibration curve.<br />

Both default and custom medium index numbers are associated with<br />

media types, plate types, proof types, and page setups. All proof and plate<br />

types are assigned a medium index number that is the default for the


4 Chapter 1 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Overview<br />

media types configured in the device. You can assign a custom medium<br />

index to a plate type or proof type, based on how you want Harmony to<br />

select a particular calibration curve.<br />

Medium index numbers associate specific calibration curves with plate<br />

types, proof types, and page setups. When Allegro RIP locates a medium<br />

index number in the Postscript file or the page setup, it uses the Harmony<br />

calibration curve specified by the medium index number and matching<br />

screening parameters.<br />

For information about Harmony, see the Harmony Reference <strong>Guide</strong> for iMPAct<br />

Workflow.<br />

Allegro Workstation<br />

The Allegro workstation is the computer that runs <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

and Allegro RIP, Allegro RIP, and Harmony. It is the entry point for digital<br />

data coming into the system. It runs on an Alpha or Intel computer<br />

connected to a local area network (LAN) over which it receives imposed<br />

PostScript files ready for output.<br />

The Allegro workstation is a high-speed workstation running the<br />

Windows NT operating system. To operate the workstation efficiently, you<br />

must have a basic understanding of Windows NT—for example, how to<br />

log on, shut down, and start up the system.<br />

For details on turning the Allegro workstation on or off, see your Alpha or Intel<br />

documentation.<br />

Tip: For optimum system performance, do not use a screen saver. Set the screen<br />

to blank in Windows NT.<br />

Output Device<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> supports the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> output device family, which<br />

includes:<br />

• <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

• VLF <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

• <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Spectrum<br />

• Proofsetter Spectrum<br />

For information on your output device, see your output device operator manual.


Software Supported by <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> 5<br />

Software Supported by <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> supports two companion software applications:<br />

• PrintLink<br />

• Staccato<br />

PrintLink<br />

Note: PrintLink is not associated with PrintLink Graphics Arts Placement Services<br />

Ltd.<br />

PrintLink is a software option available with Allegro RIP that generates<br />

separated Print Production Format (PPF) files for digital ink key preset<br />

systems.<br />

The PrintLink process uses three computers:<br />

• Allegro workstation<br />

• PPF File Reader workstation<br />

• press console<br />

Before PrintLink, PPF files were generated by scanning plates. PrintLink<br />

eliminates the need for plate scanners, resulting in faster makeready and a<br />

more efficient workflow.<br />

When PrintLink is enabled, it automatically generates PPF files while the<br />

RIP delivers raster data to the output device for imaging. The PPF files are<br />

used at the press console to control ink keys based on the PPF information.<br />

For information about PrintLink, see the PrintLink User <strong>Guide</strong> for iMPAct<br />

Workflow.


6 Chapter 1 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Overview<br />

Staccato<br />

Staccato is a software option available with Allegro RIP that offers<br />

stochastic screening controls. Staccato can be used with all CreoScitex<br />

output device systems. Combined with the stability and dot quality of<br />

CreoScitex thermal imaging technology, Staccato screening lets you create<br />

images with greater detail and lower sensitivity to press registration<br />

problems than conventional screens.<br />

Staccato uses standard desktop tools and open file formats to define<br />

screening control for any element: individual images, pages, forms, or<br />

separations. Allegro RIP then interprets and applies stochastic and<br />

conventional screens to specified elements.<br />

Staccato screening is based on Harlequin Dispersed Screening (HDS),<br />

which includes screening patterns carefully selected for optimal<br />

performance. Staccato screens can be imaged at any CreoScitex output<br />

device resolution: 1200, 1600, 2400, or 3200 dpi.<br />

For information about Staccato, see the Staccato User <strong>Guide</strong>.


<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Terminology 7<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Terminology<br />

In this manual, the following terms are used to describe the flow of data<br />

and materials through your <strong>Trendsetter</strong> system.<br />

File<br />

Image<br />

Media<br />

RIP<br />

A file is an electronic text description of one or more images<br />

using the PostScript language. You submit PostScript files to<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>, where they are RIPed by Allegro RIP,<br />

calibrated using Harmony calibration curves, and then imaged<br />

on media in the output device.<br />

An image is the electronic bitmap that is exposed onto a single<br />

media. The output device receives images and produces<br />

exposed media.<br />

Media (or medium) refers to the physical material onto which<br />

images are exposed. The output device produces one exposed<br />

medium for each image.<br />

To RIP a file is to convert it from PostScript code into a pattern<br />

of halftone dots (bitmap) called raster data (or RIPed files).<br />

This raster data is supplied to the output device to be imaged<br />

onto media.<br />

There are two RIP modes: RIP-to-disk and RIP-to-plate. The<br />

mode you choose will depend on your particular workflow. See<br />

RIP-to-Disk and RIP-to-Plate Modes Compared on page 55 for<br />

details on choosing a RIP mode.


8 Chapter 1 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Overview


2<br />

Getting<br />

Started<br />

Overview ..........................................................................................10<br />

Installing <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>............................................................10<br />

Starting <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> .............................................................10<br />

Exiting <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> ...............................................................11<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Menus...............................................................12<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Toolbar ..............................................................23


10 Chapter 2 – Getting Started<br />

Overview<br />

This chapter describes how to install, start, and exit <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>. It<br />

also describes the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> menus and toolbar.<br />

Installing <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> is installed by a CreoScitex service representative; you<br />

do not install it yourself.<br />

Starting <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> may be configured to start automatically when you<br />

turn on the Allegro workstation. When <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> starts, Allegro<br />

RIP automatically starts as well.<br />

If <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> is not configured to start automatically, you can<br />

start it manually.<br />

To restart or reboot the Allegro workstation, see your Windows NT<br />

documentation.<br />

To manually start <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>:<br />

! From the Start menu in Windows NT, point to Programs, then point to<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>, and select <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> <strong>2.0</strong>.<br />

Or:<br />

Double-click the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> shortcut on the desktop.<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> and Allegro RIP start, and the following windows<br />

display:<br />

" Allegro<br />

" <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor<br />

" Output Controller/Monitor<br />

The Output Controller/Monitor window displays only if<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> is in RIP-to-disk mode.<br />

Figure 1 shows an example of these windows.


Exiting <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> 11<br />

Figure 1: <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> windows<br />

Once <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> is running, it’s ready to receive files or<br />

commands. Look in the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor window to determine<br />

whether the output device is ready to receive images. If it is ready, the<br />

following message displays:<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> is online and ready to launch images<br />

Exiting <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

To exit <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>:<br />

! From the Allegro RIP menu, select Quit.<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> configuration information is saved and any open<br />

windows close, except for the Debugger window. You can manually<br />

close the Debugger window, leave it open to diagnose problems, or<br />

leave it open for <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> to use the next time you start the<br />

software.<br />

Note: It may take a few minutes for the windows to close.<br />

Tip: If you don’t select Quit to exit <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>, your configuration<br />

information may not be saved.


12 Chapter 2 – Getting Started<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Menus<br />

This chapter describes the functions available in <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

menus. These functions are described only as they relate to a <strong>Trendsetter</strong>.<br />

For detailed information on the features of Allegro RIP that are in <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong>, see the Allegro RIP Reference <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

Figure 2: <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> menu bar<br />

The following menus are displayed on the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> menu bar:<br />

Allegro RIP<br />

Edit<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

Color<br />

Output<br />

Fonts<br />

Input Queue<br />

Contains commands for configuring page setups,<br />

Allegro RIP, and input channels.<br />

Contains commands for copying information from the<br />

Allegro RIP window.<br />

Contains commands for displaying the <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

Monitor window, for configuring the Allegro<br />

workstation, media types, plate types, proof types, and<br />

proof color mapping table. It also contains the<br />

command for generating device-specific PPD files.<br />

Contains the command for configuring color<br />

separations styles.<br />

Contains commands for displaying the Output<br />

Controller/Monitor window.<br />

Contains commands for installing and deleting fonts<br />

within Allegro RIP. This menu can only be accessed<br />

when inputs have been stopped (for example, using the<br />

Stop Inputs icon).<br />

Contains commands for controlling input to the RIP.


<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Menus 13<br />

Allegro RIP Menu<br />

Figure 3: Allegro RIP menu<br />

Print File<br />

Use Print File as an input method for RIPing PostScript files. You can use<br />

Print File to quickly remake a PostScript file. When you submit a PostScript<br />

file this way, you must select a page setup in the Print File dialog box.<br />

Page Setup Manager<br />

Use Page Setup Manager to display the Page Setup Manager dialog box,<br />

which is used to create, edit, and delete page setups for each of your inputs.<br />

For details on how to do this, see Managing Page Setups on page 203.<br />

Configure RIP<br />

Use Configure RIP to display the Configure RIP dialog box, which is used<br />

to configure Allegro RIP. The Configure RIP dialog box is shown in<br />

Figure 4. Service personnel from CreoScitex configure Allegro RIP for you<br />

during installation of your <strong>Trendsetter</strong> system; however, you may want to<br />

switch from Multiple (Parallel) page buffering mode to Single (If required)


14 Chapter 2 – Getting Started<br />

mode. Multiple (Parallel) mode enables RIPing to disk, and Single (If<br />

required) mode enables RIPing to plate. See RIP-to-Disk and RIP-to-Plate<br />

Modes on page 52.<br />

Attention: Except for changing the RIP mode (from Single If Required to<br />

Multiple Parallel or vice versa), do not change any of the settings shown in the<br />

Configure RIP dialog box without first consulting a service representative.<br />

Figure 4: Configure RIP dialog box<br />

Device Manager<br />

Device Manager is not used with <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>.<br />

Input Controller<br />

Use Input Controller to display the Input Controller dialog box, which is<br />

used to manage inputs. You can create, edit, copy, or delete inputs.<br />

Start Inputs<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> does not automatically scan the input channels for<br />

incoming data. Start Inputs allows the software to monitor and process<br />

defined inputs. During normal operation of a <strong>Trendsetter</strong>, Start Inputs<br />

must be selected (a check mark appears beside the menu option).<br />

However, you must deselect Start Inputs in order to configure or modify<br />

settings in <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>.<br />

Note: You must select Start Inputs again when you are ready to resume normal<br />

operations.


<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Menus 15<br />

Executive<br />

Use Executive to display the Select Page Setup to Pre-Load dialog box,<br />

which allows you to type PostScript code to submit to <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

for testing purposes. It is not normally used with a <strong>Trendsetter</strong> and<br />

requires a working knowledge of the PostScript language.<br />

Language<br />

Language is not used with <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>.<br />

About Allegro RIP<br />

Use About Allegro RIP to display copyright information and the version<br />

number of Allegro RIP.<br />

Logo<br />

Use Logo to display a window that contains the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> logo.<br />

Memory Statistics<br />

Use Memory Statistics to display the memory configuration of <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong>, which was set by service personnel during installation of your<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> system. The memory statistics are displayed in the Allegro RIP<br />

window.<br />

Quit<br />

Use Quit to exit <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> while leaving Windows NT running.<br />

Important: You must observe the proper shutdown sequence when shutting<br />

down the output device and Allegro workstation. Failure to do this could result<br />

in permanent data loss.


16 Chapter 2 – Getting Started<br />

Edit Menu<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> Menu<br />

Figure 5: Edit menu<br />

Copy<br />

Use Copy to copy text that you selected in the Allegro window to the<br />

clipboard.<br />

Paste<br />

Use Paste to paste text that you copied in the Allegro window to a text<br />

editor application, such as Notepad.<br />

Figure 6: <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu


<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Menus 17<br />

Select Device<br />

Use Select Device to display the Select Output Device dialog box.<br />

Select Cassette<br />

The Select Cassette command is not used with <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>.<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor<br />

Use <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor to display the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor window,<br />

which lists messages sent from the output device. If the output device<br />

encounters problems imaging media, such as edge detection failure, wrong<br />

media size, etc., those errors are logged here. The <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor<br />

window also displays the progress of the files being imaged in the output<br />

device. Usually, the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor window is displayed by default<br />

when you start <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>.<br />

Workstation <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Use Workstation <strong>Configuration</strong> to display the <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box,<br />

which lets you choose, among other things, the units of measure you want<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> to use. See Configuring the Allegro Workstation on<br />

page 102.<br />

Media <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Use Media <strong>Configuration</strong> to display the Media <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box,<br />

which lets you select the:<br />

• media available for imaging<br />

• medium index number, which is used to select Harmony dot gain<br />

calibration curves<br />

These values determine which media imaging parameters the imaging<br />

head is to use. The values also determine the size of halftone dots produced<br />

when files are RIPed. The values are set by service personnel during<br />

installation of your <strong>Trendsetter</strong> system. You can configure the Media<br />

<strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box to use a different medium index value.


18 Chapter 2 – Getting Started<br />

Plate Definition<br />

Use Plate Definition to display the Plate Definition dialog box. Plate type<br />

definitions include:<br />

• plate type name<br />

• media type on which to base your plate type<br />

• size around drum<br />

• size along drum<br />

• thickness<br />

• laser exposure<br />

• medium index number (optional)<br />

These values are usually set by service personnel during installation of your<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> system.You can create, edit, and delete media configurations in<br />

this dialog box.<br />

Note: If you have PrintLink installed, the Plate Type Specifications dialog box<br />

provides access to PrintLink configuration. For information about configuring<br />

PrintLink, refer to the PrintLink User <strong>Guide</strong> for iMPAct Workflow.<br />

Proof Definition<br />

Use Proof Definition to display the Proof Definition dialog box, which lets<br />

you define proof types. Proof type definition includes:<br />

• proof type name<br />

• media type on which to base your proof type<br />

• proof size<br />

• size around drum<br />

• size along drum<br />

• medium index number (optional)<br />

These values are usually set by service personnel during installation of your<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> system.You can create, edit, and delete media configurations in<br />

this dialog box.


<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Menus 19<br />

Proof Color Mapping<br />

Use Proof Color Mapping to display the Configure Proof Color Mappings<br />

dialog box. This dialog box is used to map color names recognized by<br />

Allegro RIP to media color names recognized by <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> for a<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> Spectrum or Proofsetter Spectrum output device. They are not<br />

used for any other process.<br />

Create <strong>Trendsetter</strong> PPD File<br />

Use Create <strong>Trendsetter</strong> PPD File to display the Save PPD File dialog box,<br />

which lets you configure and generate PPD and PPX files. PPD files are<br />

used by imposition and desktop software applications. PPX files contain<br />

virtual punch coordinate information and are only used by Preps<br />

imposition software. For details on creating a PPD file, see Generating<br />

Device-specific PPD Files on page 131.<br />

Scripts<br />

Use Scripts to display the Recorder Scripts dialog box, which lets you run<br />

PERL scripts that perform maintenance or troubleshooting tasks. Scripts is<br />

not available unless PERL scripts have been loaded onto your system by<br />

service personnel.<br />

Reinitialize <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

Use Reinitialize <strong>Trendsetter</strong> to reset the output device to an idle or ready<br />

state. If you reset the <strong>Trendsetter</strong>, the output device may flush media from<br />

the drum. If this happens, remove the media.<br />

For more information, see your output device operator manual.<br />

Load Carrier<br />

Select Load Carrier when you want to load the carrier onto the drum in a<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> Spectrum or Proofsetter Spectrum output device. Carriers are<br />

only used for digital halftone proofing.<br />

Unload Carrier<br />

Select Unload Carrier when you want to unload the carrier from the drum<br />

in a <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Spectrum or Proofsetter Spectrum output device. Carriers<br />

are only used for digital halftone proofing.


20 Chapter 2 – Getting Started<br />

Color Menu<br />

Eject Proof<br />

Select Eject Proof when you want to manually eject the receptor from a<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> Spectrum or Proofsetter Spectrum output device. The Eject<br />

Proof command is only used for digital halftone proofing.<br />

Harmony<br />

Select Harmony to start Harmony software, which is used to create<br />

calibration curves for <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>. For information on Harmony,<br />

refer to the Harmony documentation.<br />

Output Menu<br />

Figure 7: Color menu<br />

Separations Manager<br />

Use Separations Manager to display the Separations Manager dialog box,<br />

which lets you create, edit, and delete separations styles.<br />

Figure 8: Output menu<br />

Media Manager<br />

The Media Manager command is not used with <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>.<br />

Cassette Manager<br />

The Cassette Manager command is not used with <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>.


<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Menus 21<br />

Fonts Menu<br />

Calibration Manager<br />

The Calibration Manager command is not used with a <strong>Trendsetter</strong>;<br />

Harmony is used for color calibration. Use the Harmony command from<br />

the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu to access Harmony.<br />

See Harmony Reference <strong>Guide</strong> for iMPAct Workflow and Harmony User <strong>Guide</strong><br />

for information on Harmony.<br />

Print Calibration<br />

The Print Calibration command is not used with <strong>Trendsetter</strong> output<br />

devices.<br />

Media Monitor<br />

The Media Monitor command is not used with <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>.<br />

Output Controller<br />

Use Output Controller to display the Output Controller/Monitor window,<br />

which is used to manage files that are RIPed to disk. Output Controller is<br />

usually selected by default when you start <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>. It is a<br />

feature of RIP-to-disk mode only—not RIP-to-plate. For more<br />

information about this window, see Output Controller/Monitor Window on<br />

page 66.<br />

Figure 9: Fonts menu<br />

Use this menu to manage fonts.<br />

Note: The Fonts menu can only be accessed if Start Inputs is disabled. See<br />

Start Inputs on page 14.


22 Chapter 2 – Getting Started<br />

Input Queue Menu<br />

Install Fonts<br />

Use Install Fonts to display the Install Fonts dialog box, which is used to<br />

install new fonts. For the procedure, see Installing a Font on page 127.<br />

List Fonts<br />

Use List Fonts to list all of the installed fonts in the Allegro RIP window.<br />

Refer to Listing Installed Fonts on page 128 for further details.<br />

Fonts displayed in the Allegro RIP window are sometimes hard to read.<br />

You can also view installed fonts in the Delete Highlighted Fonts dialog<br />

box. If you use this method to view fonts, be sure to click Cancel to exit the<br />

Delete Highlighted Fonts dialog box without deleting any fonts.<br />

Proof Fonts<br />

The Proof Fonts command, only visible if Start Inputs is selected, is not<br />

used with <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>.<br />

Delete Fonts<br />

Use Delete Fonts to display the Delete Highlighted Fonts dialog box, which<br />

lets you delete fonts from Allegro RIP. See Deleting a Font on page 129 for<br />

additional information.<br />

Figure 10: Input Queue menu<br />

Use this menu to manage the Input Queue.<br />

Kill Current Job<br />

Use Kill Current Job to delete the job currently being RIPed.<br />

Stop Input Queue<br />

Use Stop Input Queue to let the current job continue, but to stop the RIP<br />

from accepting input.


<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Toolbar 23<br />

Abort Input Queue<br />

Use Abort Input Queue to kill the current job and stop RIP inputs.<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Toolbar<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> includes a toolbar, which lets you quickly access dialog<br />

boxes. This section describes the toolbar.<br />

Figure 11: <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> toolbar<br />

Use the toolbar buttons as indicated:<br />

Print File<br />

Displays the Print File dialog box, where you can<br />

choose a file to print. This is equivalent to the Allegro<br />

RIP > Print File command.<br />

Print<br />

Calibration<br />

Not used.<br />

Start Inputs<br />

Stop Inputs<br />

Starts any enabled inputs. This is equivalent to the<br />

Allegro RIP > Start Inputs command when the inputs<br />

are stopped. When inputs are started, defined inputs<br />

are monitored and processed.<br />

Stops any enabled inputs. This is equivalent to the<br />

Allegro RIP > Start Inputs command when the inputs<br />

are enabled. Stop inputs in order to configure or<br />

modify settings.


24 Chapter 2 – Getting Started<br />

Page Setup<br />

Manager<br />

Displays the Page Setup Manager dialog box, where<br />

you can create and edit page setups. This is equivalent<br />

to the Allegro RIP > Page Setup Manager command.<br />

Device<br />

Manager<br />

Not used.<br />

Separations<br />

Manager<br />

Displays the Separations Manager dialog box, where<br />

you can create and edit separation styles for the<br />

selected device. This is equivalent to the Color ><br />

Separations Manager command.<br />

Color Setup<br />

Manager<br />

Not used.<br />

Calibration<br />

Manager<br />

Not used.<br />

Harmony is used instead for tonal calibration. You<br />

access Harmony by selecting Harmony from the<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu.<br />

Cassette<br />

Manager<br />

Not used.


<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Toolbar 25<br />

Input<br />

Controller<br />

Displays the Input Controller dialog box. Also, this<br />

button hides the controller if it is already displayed.<br />

This is equivalent to the Input Controller command on<br />

the Allegro RIP menu.<br />

Media<br />

Manager<br />

Not used.


26 Chapter 2 – Getting Started


3<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong><br />

Concepts<br />

Overview ..........................................................................................28<br />

PostScript File Types ..........................................................................28<br />

Media Types......................................................................................29<br />

Proof Types and Plate Types...............................................................31<br />

Separation Styles...............................................................................32<br />

Page Setups ......................................................................................36<br />

Page Features....................................................................................40<br />

Medium Index...................................................................................44<br />

Proof Color Mapping Table Spectrum Devices....................................48<br />

RIP-to-Disk and RIP-to-Plate Modes ...................................................52<br />

Input Channels .................................................................................57<br />

Device-specific PPD Files....................................................................61<br />

Output Controller/Monitor Window..................................................66<br />

Allegro Window................................................................................68<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor Window ............................................................69


28 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

Overview<br />

This chapter gives you an introduction to the concepts you need to<br />

configure and use the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>.<br />

PostScript File Types<br />

You can process three types of PostScript files using <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>:<br />

• composite<br />

• pre-separated<br />

• separated<br />

For composite PostScript files, colors are not separated, and all color<br />

information is contained in one file. For pre-separated PostScript, colors<br />

are separated, but all color separation information is contained in one file.<br />

For separated PostScript files, each file contains information for one color<br />

separation—that is, one file each for cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and for<br />

any spot colors.<br />

CMYK<br />

K<br />

Y<br />

M<br />

C<br />

C<br />

Y<br />

M<br />

K<br />

Composite Files Pre-Separated Files Separated Files<br />

Any number of<br />

colors in one file<br />

Any number of<br />

color separations<br />

in one file<br />

Figure 12: PostScript file types<br />

One color separation<br />

per file


Media Types 29<br />

Media Types<br />

This section contains two parts:<br />

• What is a media type?<br />

• How are media types used?<br />

What Is a Media Type?<br />

How Are Media Types Used?<br />

A media type refers to a particular brand of media—for example, <strong>Kodak</strong><br />

DITP. It includes the media type name, laser exposure, and medium index<br />

number. This information can only be configured within <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong> by a service representative.<br />

Media information is configured in the output device, and <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong> displays this information in the Media <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box.<br />

All the media type information is display only, except for the medium<br />

index number. You can change the medium index number if desired. See<br />

also Medium Index on page 44.<br />

You use media when you create proof types and plate types. See Proof Types<br />

and Plate Types on page 31. Before you can define a proof type or plate<br />

type, you must select a media type on which to base your proof type or<br />

plate type.


30 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

Plate Type<br />

Media Type: <strong>Kodak</strong> IR<br />

Size: 32" x 44"<br />

Media Type<br />

What Is It: <strong>Kodak</strong> IR<br />

Manufacturer: <strong>Kodak</strong><br />

Plate Type<br />

Media Type: <strong>Kodak</strong> IR<br />

Size: 20" x 30"<br />

Media Type<br />

What Is It:<br />

Laser Matchprint NA<br />

Manufacturer: Imation<br />

Proof Type<br />

Media Type:<br />

Laser Matchprint NA<br />

Format: 4-up<br />

Proof Type<br />

Media Type:<br />

Laser Matchprint NA<br />

Format: 8-up<br />

Figure 13: Media types, proof types, and plate types


Proof Types and Plate Types 31<br />

Proof Types and Plate Types<br />

What Are Proof Types and Plate Types?<br />

This section contains three parts:<br />

• What are proof types and plate types?<br />

• How are proof types and plate types used?<br />

• How do proof types and plate types relate to PPD files?<br />

Proof types and plate types are based on media types. They include the<br />

media type as well as information about media size and thickness.<br />

How Are Proof Types and Plate Types Used?<br />

Proof types are used for digital halftone proofmaking, and plate types are<br />

used for all other processes, such as, platemaking, film-making, and<br />

thermal blueline-making.<br />

On installation, your <strong>Trendsetter</strong> is configured with the media types you<br />

will use to create your proof types and plate types. You must define proof<br />

types and/or plate types before you can image those plate types and/or<br />

proof types.<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> automatically selects plate types or proof types for<br />

you, based on the dimensions of the RIPed file it is processing.<br />

However, you can configure <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> to allow manual proof<br />

type or plate type selection.<br />

How Do Proof Types and Plate Types Relate to PPD Files?<br />

Proof type and plate type information is stored in the device-specific PPD<br />

files for use during imposition.<br />

Whenever you add, delete, or modify a plate or proof type, you must<br />

generate a new PPD file in order to make the imposition workstation aware<br />

of the new proof types and/or plate types. See Generating Device-specific<br />

PPD Files on page 131.<br />

Note: Configured plate and proof type information stored in the PPD is used by<br />

Harmony. PPD files allow Harmony access to media types, proof types, plate<br />

types, and screening information available at the Allegro workstation. See<br />

Harmony Reference <strong>Guide</strong> for iMPAct Workflow.


32 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

Separation Styles<br />

This section contains two parts:<br />

• What is a separation style?<br />

• How are separation styles used?<br />

Separation styles are based on the concept of color space. Color space is<br />

determined by the information in the input file and the desired output.<br />

Color space determines the type of separation style required for handling<br />

the color separations. For example, a separation style would determine<br />

whether a plate or proof is output for each color separation.<br />

Although the RIP can interpret file types of other kinds, the only color<br />

spaces (that is, input or output) supported by workflows are halftone<br />

CMYK and monochrome. Input files are either monochrome or CMYK.<br />

Separated PostScript files are monochrome input and monochrome<br />

output. Composite CMYK PostScript files are input as CMYK and output<br />

as monochrome separations.<br />

Each separation style specifies the color space of the input file and the<br />

output file.<br />

What Is a Separation Style?<br />

In Allegro RIP, a separation style is a named collection of color separation<br />

and screening settings. A separation style contains the following<br />

information:<br />

• color space—CMYK or monochrome<br />

• which color separations Allegro RIP is to generate for composite and<br />

pre-separated PostScript files, and the order in which it is to generate<br />

the color separations<br />

• how to handle spot colors<br />

• spot shape<br />

• screening angles and line frequency


Separation Styles 33<br />

Input<br />

Color Space<br />

Output<br />

CMYK - Mono<br />

C<br />

Y<br />

CMYK<br />

Composite<br />

M<br />

Separations<br />

K<br />

C<br />

Y<br />

Mono - Mono<br />

C<br />

Y<br />

M<br />

K<br />

PreSeparated<br />

M<br />

Separations<br />

K<br />

C<br />

Y<br />

Mono - Mono<br />

C<br />

Y<br />

M<br />

K<br />

Separated<br />

M<br />

Separations<br />

K<br />

Figure 14: Color space of input and output files<br />

Separation styles are used by page setups. After a style —based on a color<br />

space—has been defined, the style can be linked to one or more page<br />

setups.


34 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

Page Setups<br />

Composite<br />

Plates<br />

Separation Styles<br />

Composite<br />

Proofs<br />

Composite<br />

Composite<br />

Films<br />

Separated<br />

Plates<br />

Separated<br />

Proofs<br />

Separated<br />

Figure 15: More than one page setup using the same separation style<br />

Each page setup must specify a separation style, but the same separation<br />

style can be used by many page setups. For example, the separation style<br />

based on CMYK to monochrome color space would be used by both the<br />

page setup defined for making proofs and the page setup defined for<br />

making plates in a composite workflow.


Separation Styles 35<br />

How Are Separation Styles Used?<br />

Separation styles are used to instruct Allegro RIP how to process color<br />

separations and how to apply screening.<br />

Each page setup contains a separation style to direct Allegro RIP how to<br />

process color separations. You can use the same separation style in several<br />

page setups, or you can keep a number of separation styles for different<br />

types of page setups. For example, you can have a different separation style<br />

for each PostScript type:<br />

• one for separated PostScript<br />

• one for pre-separated PostScript<br />

• one for composite PostScript<br />

Color Space<br />

Separation<br />

Style<br />

Page<br />

Setup<br />

Page<br />

Setup<br />

Workflow<br />

Page<br />

Setup<br />

Workflow<br />

Figure 16: Building blocks of a workflow


36 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

Page Setups<br />

This section contains three parts:<br />

• What is a page setup?<br />

• How are page setups used?<br />

• page setup overrides<br />

Allegro RIP processes jobs according to page setups. A page setup is a<br />

combination of default settings and overrides that define how Allegro RIP<br />

produces pages. Each page setup specifies a complete page format in terms<br />

of the orientation, resolution, size, and so on.<br />

Page setups are managed in one central place, the Page Setup Manager<br />

dialog box. This dialog box is used for creating new page setups, and for<br />

editing or deleting existing page setups.<br />

In previous versions of the RIP, a current page setup could be specified.<br />

The concept of a current page setup is no longer applicable. Each RIP input<br />

channel must be explicitly assigned a page setup.<br />

What Is a Page Setup?<br />

In Allegro RIP, a page setup is a named collection of settings used to<br />

process a PostScript job. A page setup contains the following information:<br />

• output device name<br />

• separation styles, screening, and color options<br />

• page layout information<br />

• resolution<br />

• medium index number<br />

• page feature (optional)<br />

• effects, such as, mirrorprint (optional)<br />

• scaling (optional)<br />

The Page Setup dialog boxes also provide access to the Page Setup Options<br />

and Page Setup Option Extras dialog boxes.<br />

All page setups are visible in the Page Setup Manager. To view the Page<br />

Setup Manager, select Page Setup Manager from the Allegro RIP menu.


Page Setups 37<br />

How Are Page Setups Used?<br />

Page Setup Overrides<br />

Page setups are attached to input channels, which are job submission<br />

mechanisms. A hot folder is an example of an input channel. See also Input<br />

Channels on page 57.<br />

When you submit PostScript files to <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> via an input<br />

channel, the software uses the instructions in the page setup that is<br />

attached to the input channel to process the PostScript files. For this<br />

reason, it is important that you submit your PostScript files to <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong> via the correct input channel.<br />

When Allegro RIP is processing PostScript files, it processes them<br />

according to:<br />

• page setup overrides and enabled page features<br />

• instructions in the PostScript file<br />

• page setup defaults<br />

When you submit a PostScript file to <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> via an input<br />

channel, Allegro RIP reads the page setup attached to the input channel<br />

and remembers:<br />

• enabled overrides in the page setup<br />

• enabled page features in the page setup<br />

Overrides are any options that specify an override, for example, the<br />

Override resolution in job check box. When you select these override check<br />

boxes in a page setup, you enable the override.<br />

Page features are enabled in a page setup by selecting the Enable feature<br />

check box, then selecting a page feature from the drop-down list.<br />

Allegro RIP remembers which overrides and page features are enabled in<br />

the page setup, then it interprets the PostScript file to find RIPing<br />

instructions.<br />

When Allegro RIP cannot find instructions in the PostScript file, it uses the<br />

page setup defaults. For example, if Allegro RIP cannot find the resolution<br />

for the PostScript file in the PostScript file instructions, it uses the default<br />

resolution in the page setup.


38 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

! ! ! !<br />

! ! ! !<br />

Imposed<br />

PostScript<br />

Input<br />

Highest<br />

Priority<br />

1<br />

RIP<br />

RIP<br />

Overrides<br />

Resolution<br />

Separations<br />

Angles<br />

Line Screen<br />

Spot Shape<br />

RIP Page Setup<br />

AND<br />

/OR<br />

Page<br />

Features<br />

Spectrum.ps<br />

2<br />

RIP<br />

Incoming File<br />

PostScript<br />

Instructions<br />

Lowest<br />

Priority<br />

3<br />

RIP<br />

RIP Page Setup<br />

Defaults<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong><br />

RIP PRIORITY THEORY<br />

Output<br />

RIPed File<br />

to disk<br />

to device<br />

Figure 17: Override hierarchy<br />

Override Examples<br />

This section contains two examples:<br />

• resolution<br />

• medium index number


Page Setups 39<br />

Resolution Example<br />

The parameters for this example are:<br />

• An imposed PostScript file is created using Preps. The PostScript file<br />

contains a resolution of 600 dpi.<br />

• The page setup attached to the input channel contains a resolution<br />

override.<br />

When you submit the PostScript file to <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>, this is what<br />

happens:<br />

1. Allegro RIP reads the page setup and remembers any enabled overrides<br />

and page features.<br />

The page setup contains a resolution override. The resolution override<br />

is 1200 dpi.<br />

2. Allegro RIP interprets the PostScript file to find the instructions.<br />

Allegro RIP finds a resolution of 600 dpi in the PostScript file.<br />

3. Allegro RIPs the PostScript file using the instructions it gathered.<br />

Because the page setup contains a resolution override, Allegro RIP uses<br />

the resolution in the page setup, not the resolution specified in the<br />

PostScript file.<br />

Medium Index Example<br />

The parameters for this example are:<br />

• Medium index numbers are included in the device-specific PPD file.<br />

• A PostScript file is created using Preps. The PostScript file contains a<br />

plate type from the device-specific PPD file, and the plate type specifies<br />

a medium index number.<br />

• The page setup attached to the input channel contains an enabled page<br />

feature: the OverMediumIndex.ps page feature.


40 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

When you submit the PostScript file to <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>, this is what<br />

happens:<br />

1. Allegro RIP reads the page setup and remembers any enabled overrides<br />

and page features.<br />

The OverMediumIndex.ps page feature is enabled. This page feature is<br />

an override that tells Allegro RIP to ignore the medium index number<br />

in the PostScript file and use the medium index number in the page<br />

setup.<br />

2. Allegro RIP interprets the PostScript file to find the instructions.<br />

Allegro RIP finds a medium index number in the PostScript file.<br />

3. Allegro RIPs the PostScript file using the instructions it gathered.<br />

Because the OverMediumIndex.ps page feature is enabled, Allegro RIP<br />

uses the medium index number specified in the page setup, not the<br />

medium index number specified in the PostScript file.<br />

Page Features<br />

This section contains five parts:<br />

• What are page features?<br />

• How are page features used?<br />

• What is the Spectrum.ps proofing page feature?<br />

• What is the RIPToHeldQueue.ps proofing page feature?<br />

• What are the ProofCrop22x26.ps, ProofCrop22x30.ps, and<br />

ProofCrop30x40.ps proofing page features?<br />

What Are Page Features?<br />

Page features are files that are included with <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>. They are<br />

stored in the \allegro\sw\pagefeatures folder.<br />

You use page setups to enable page features. To enable a page feature in a<br />

page setup, select the Enable feature check box in the Edit Page Setup or<br />

New Page Setup dialog box, then select a page feature from the drop-down<br />

list. The selected page feature is enabled for the page setup. When<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> uses the page setup to process a PostScript file, it also<br />

runs the selected page feature.


Page Features 41<br />

How Are Page Features Used?<br />

Page feature files let you specify a fragment of PostScript code. Page<br />

features do not change the PostScript code in your PostScript file; they<br />

override specified lines of PostScript code during RIPing.<br />

What Is the Spectrum.ps Proofing Page Feature?<br />

Spectrum.ps is a proofing page feature used with a page setup that is<br />

configured to process PostScript files for digital halftone proofing. It runs<br />

three page features located in the \allegro\sw\page features folder that are<br />

specific to processing PostScript files for proofmaking:<br />

• OverMediumIndex.ps<br />

• OverMirrorPrint.ps<br />

• NoClampClipping.ps<br />

OverMediumIndex.ps lets the medium index number in the Allegro RIP<br />

page setup override the medium index number specified in the imposed<br />

PostScript file. This page feature lets you use a PostScript file that you<br />

imposed for platemaking for proofmaking as well, because it directs<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> to use the correct medium index number from the<br />

proofmaking page setup.<br />

For example, when you impose a PostScript file for platemaking, you select<br />

the plate type, and your imposition software includes the medium index<br />

number for the plate type in the PostScript file. Because the medium index<br />

number is in the PostScript file, it takes precedence over the medium index<br />

number specified in the Allegro RIP page setup. If you use the imposed<br />

PostScript file for proofmaking and use a proofing page setup with the<br />

OverMediumIndex.ps page feature selected, <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> overrides<br />

the medium index number specified in the imposed PostScript file and<br />

instead uses the medium index number specified in the proofmaking page<br />

setup. This override is necessary since the medium index number in the<br />

PostScript is correct for platemaking, but not for proofmaking.<br />

Note: To make the medium index number available in the PPD file, you must<br />

select the Add Medium Index to PPD check box in the <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog<br />

box before generating the PPD file.<br />

OverMirrorPrint.ps lets the Mirrorprint check box in the Allegro RIP page<br />

setup take precedence over the mirrorprint setting specified in the<br />

PostScript file. When the Mirrorprint check box is selected,


42 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

OverMirrorPrint.ps ensures <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> mirrorprints the<br />

PostScript files; when the Mirrorprint check box is cleared,<br />

OverMirrorPrint.ps ensures that <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> doesn’t mirrorprint<br />

the PostScript files.<br />

NoClampClipping.ps overrides raster image clipping. When this page<br />

feature is not used, <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> clips the leading and trailing edges<br />

of raster images to accommodate the portion of the plate obscured by<br />

leading- and trailing-edge clamps. However, the clamps don’t obscure any<br />

image area when the output device is used for proofmaking. When<br />

proofmaking, the clamps are used to secure the proof carrier to the drum,<br />

but the receptor and donor sheets are held in place by vacuum. Thus, the<br />

entire imageable area of the proofing media can be used.<br />

The Spectrum.ps page feature can run more page features than the ones<br />

described above. If you want the Spectrum.ps page feature to run<br />

additional page features, copy the page features from the \allegro\sw\page<br />

features folder to the \allegro\sw\page features\spectrum folder. See<br />

Configuring Page Features on page 149.<br />

What Is the RIPToHeldQueue.ps Proofing Page Feature?<br />

RIPToHeldQueue.ps is a page feature designed for digital halftone<br />

proofmaking in RIP-to-disk mode. The RIPToHeldQueue.ps page feature<br />

does two things:<br />

• It creates a dummy page buffer called<br />

----RipToHeldQueueSeparator----- for each job. When the ----<br />

RipToHeldQueueSeparator----- page buffer moves to the Current<br />

Queue in the Output Controller/Monitor window, it selects the<br />

Disable output check box. When the Disable output check box is<br />

selected, the software holds all RIPed job files, called page buffers, in<br />

the Active Queue until you clear the Disable output check box.<br />

• It automatically moves newly RIPed page buffers from the Active<br />

Queue to the Held Queue.


Page Features 43<br />

The purpose of the RIPToHeldQueue.ps page feature is to let the system<br />

image one job while simultaneously RIPing another job to disk. You can<br />

submit jobs to <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> at any time to be RIPed to disk, and you<br />

must manually initiate imaging for each job.<br />

Note: When you are imaging one digital halftone proof while RIPing the second<br />

one to disk, we recommend that you have a Symmetric Multi Processor (SMP)<br />

workstation to handle the workload demand. You also need an SMP Allegro<br />

dongle for Allegro RIP to use multiple CPUs. We also recommend that you<br />

configure the workstation so that the page buffers are stored on a separate drive<br />

from the spooled job files. This prevents a single drive from being overloaded.<br />

If you want the Spectrum.ps proofing page feature to run the<br />

RIPToHeldQueue.ps page feature, you must copy RIPToHeldQueue.ps from<br />

the \allegro\sw\page features folder to the \allegro\sw\page<br />

features\spectrum folder. See Configuring Page Features on page 149.<br />

What Are the ProofCrop Proofing Page Features?<br />

The ProofCrop22x26.ps, ProofCrop22x30.ps, and ProofCrop30x40.ps page<br />

features crop RIPed files to fit onto the proof type sizes that are available<br />

for digital halftone proofing. The name of the page feature indicates the<br />

proof type size for which the page feature is intended.<br />

Note: The proof type sizes for Spectrum 1.1 or higher are smaller than the<br />

Spectrum 1.0 proof type sizes.<br />

These page features are useful in two situations:<br />

• You are re-imaging a Spectrum 1.0 proofing job using a Spectrum 1.1<br />

or higher system, and the RIPed files are too large for the proof type<br />

sizes that are available with your system.<br />

• You imposed a job for platemaking and want to create a digital<br />

halftone proof of the files; however, the RIPed files are too large for the<br />

available proof type sizes.<br />

In both cases, you can use the ProofCrop22x26.ps, ProofCrop22x30.ps, or<br />

ProofCrop30x40.ps page feature to crop the RIPed file to fit a different<br />

proof type.<br />

If you choose the main proofing page feature (Spectrum.ps) to run either<br />

the ProofCrop22x26.ps, ProofCrop22x30.ps, or ProofCrop30x40.ps page<br />

feature, copy the page feature from \allegro\sw\page features to the<br />

\allegro\sw\page features\spectrum folder.


44 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

Medium Index<br />

This section contains five parts:<br />

• What is a medium index number?<br />

• How is a medium index number used?<br />

• How do I add medium index numbers to PostScript files?<br />

• How is the OverMediumIndex.ps page feature used?<br />

• How are medium index numbers related to PPD files?<br />

What Is a Medium Index Number?<br />

How Is a Medium Index Number Used?<br />

A medium index number specifies a Harmony calibration curve. Each<br />

media type and page setup has a medium index number linked to it.<br />

Proof types and plate types are based on media types, so they assume the<br />

medium index number associated with the media type. However, you can<br />

give a proof type or plate type a custom medium index number to call a<br />

specific Harmony calibration curve.<br />

For example, if most of your presses print the same with <strong>Kodak</strong> plates, use<br />

index 900 in all the plate types used for those presses. For a particular press<br />

type that prints differently, use index 901 for its plate type to choose special<br />

Harmony calibration curves.<br />

While any number may be used for the medium index, CreoScitex has set<br />

up standard numbers for each supported media type. This is called the<br />

default medium index number.<br />

See the Allegro RIP Reference <strong>Guide</strong> for a list of the default numbers by media<br />

type.<br />

A custom medium index number is a number that the user has changed<br />

from the media default. The number must fall within the range configured<br />

for that particular media. For example, 900 is the default medium index<br />

number for <strong>Kodak</strong> DITP, so a custom medium index using that media<br />

would be anything in the range 901-999.<br />

Medium index numbers identify Harmony calibration curves.<br />

For information on creating Harmony calibration curves, refer to the Harmony<br />

User <strong>Guide</strong>.


Medium Index 45<br />

Each media type is associated with a medium index number. Proof types<br />

and plate types assume the medium index number from the media type on<br />

which they are based. You can associate a custom medium index number<br />

with a proof type or plate type if required.<br />

You must also specify a medium index in each page setup.<br />

When you submit PostScript files to <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> via an input<br />

channel, the software applies a page setup to the PostScript files. Allegro<br />

RIP interprets the instructions in the PostScript file and in the page setup<br />

and uses the medium index number from the PostScript file or from the<br />

page setup. Allegro RIP then selects the correct Harmony calibration<br />

curve, based on the medium index number, and applies the curve to the<br />

Postscript file during RIPing.<br />

When the PostScript file and the page setup contain different medium<br />

index numbers, Allegro RIP uses the medium index in the PostScript file<br />

unless the page feature OverMediumIndex.ps is specified in the page setup.<br />

The medium index number used by the RIP is determined by three things:<br />

• the OverMediumIndex.ps page feature<br />

• instructions in the PostScript file<br />

Or:<br />

• page setup defaults<br />

And:<br />

• a configured plate or proof type with the same medium index number.<br />

When there are different numbers specified in different places (for<br />

example, the PostScript file and the page setup) a hierarchy of overrides<br />

exists. For information on this hierarchy, see Page Setup Overrides on<br />

page 37.


46 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

How Do I Add Medium Index Numbers to PostScript Files?<br />

For medium index numbers to be included in the PostScript file, you must:<br />

1. Select the Add Medium Index to PPD check box in the <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

dialog box in <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>.<br />

2. Generate a device-specific PPD file, then make it available to your<br />

imposition software.<br />

3. Select a proof type or plate type from the PPD file when imposing the<br />

PostScript.<br />

When selected in imposition software, the medium index number for the<br />

selected proof type or plate type is included in the PostScript file that the<br />

imposition software generates. When Allegro RIP interprets the PostScript<br />

file, it finds the medium index number associated with each proof type or<br />

plate type.<br />

Table 1 summarizes how the medium index numbers for media types,<br />

proof types, plate types, and page setups relate to each other.<br />

Table 1: Summary of places medium index can be defined<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong><br />

setting<br />

Media type<br />

Proof type or<br />

plate type<br />

Page setup<br />

Medium index<br />

Default medium index number for the media type<br />

Assumes the default medium index number from the<br />

media type on which it is based.<br />

You can change the default medium index number<br />

and specify a custom medium index number.<br />

You must specify a medium index number in each<br />

page setup.<br />

Can specify a custom medium index and enable the<br />

page feature OverMediumIndex.ps. This page feature<br />

overrides medium index numbers specified in the<br />

PostScript file.


Medium Index 47<br />

How Is the OverMediumIndex.ps Page Feature Used?<br />

OverMediumIndex.ps is a page feature that is used to override the medium<br />

index number specified in the PostScript file with the medium index<br />

number specified in the page setup. See also Page Features on page 40.<br />

How Are Medium Index Numbers Related to PPD Files?<br />

When you select the Add Medium Index to PPD check box in the<br />

<strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box, <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> includes medium index<br />

numbers in the device-specific PPD file it generates.<br />

When you make the PPD file available to your imposition software, you<br />

can select proof types and/or plate types. The imposition software includes<br />

the selected proof types or plate types—and their associated medium<br />

index numbers—in the PostScript it generates.<br />

Allegro RIP can interpret the medium index numbers and apply the<br />

correct plate type or proof type and request a matching Harmony<br />

calibration curve.


48 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

Proof Color Mapping Table Spectrum Devices<br />

Note: The proof color mapping table is only used when you’re creating digital<br />

halftone proofs.<br />

What Is a Proof Color Mapping Table?<br />

This section contains three parts:<br />

• What is a proof color mapping table?<br />

• How is the proof color mapping table used?<br />

• Why is the proof color mapping table needed?<br />

The proof color mapping table contains color mappings for digital<br />

halftone proofing. Color mappings consist of two names:<br />

• RIP color name<br />

• device color name<br />

The RIP color name is the name of the color in the PostScript file<br />

recognized by Allegro RIP, and the device color name is the name of the<br />

colored media recognized by <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> for the output device.<br />

The names of the colored media you have at your site are configured in the<br />

output device by service personnel when your system is installed. The four<br />

process colors are named cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. If you have spot<br />

color media, they are also configured in the output device and are named,<br />

for example, red or orange. These color names are the default color<br />

mappings. You can view them in the Configure Proof Color Mappings<br />

dialog box.<br />

The default color names are listed in two columns in the Configure Proof<br />

Color Mappings dialog box—RIP Color and Device Color—and the name<br />

in each column is the same. For example, a cyan medium is listed in the RIP<br />

Color and Device Color columns as Cyan.


Proof Color Mapping Table Spectrum Devices 49<br />

Figure 18: Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box<br />

Note: Display the Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box by selecting Proof<br />

Color Mapping from the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu.<br />

You can add additional RIP color names to the Configure Proof Color<br />

Mappings dialog box and map them to existing device color names to<br />

create new color mappings. For <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> to correctly process<br />

PostScript files for digital halftone proofing, the names of the colors in the<br />

PostScript files must be added to the Configure Proof Color Mappings<br />

dialog box and mapped to an existing device color name. Each name in the<br />

RIP Color column must be unique.<br />

You are not required to add all the color mappings that you plan to use to<br />

the Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box before you start<br />

processing a digital halftone proofing job. You can add color mappings<br />

during processing. <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> displays the Unknown Proofing<br />

RIP Color dialog box, which lets you create a color mapping for the job<br />

that the software is currently processing.<br />

For instructions on using the Unknown RIP Color dialog box, see the <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong> User <strong>Guide</strong>.


50 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

Figure 19: Unknown Proofing RIP Color dialog box<br />

You can also choose whether or not to add the new color mapping to the<br />

Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box.<br />

Note: The color mappings are used to instruct the output device; they are not<br />

used to instruct Allegro RIP.<br />

How Is the Proof Color Mapping Table Used?<br />

The color mappings in the Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box are<br />

used for all jobs. However, before you submit a job to <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>,<br />

you can modify the color mappings to make them job-specific, then<br />

submit the job for processing. <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> uses the modified color<br />

mappings for the job. After the job is processed, click the Defaults button<br />

in the Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box to return the default<br />

color mappings.<br />

When a device color is added to the output device firmware, the Proof<br />

Color Mapping Table is automatically updated when you restart<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>. The Proof Color Mapping Table is also automatically<br />

updated when you restart the software after a device color is removed from<br />

the output device firmware.<br />

Why Is the Proof Color Mapping Table Needed?<br />

The proof color mapping table is needed to create digital halftone proofs.<br />

It resolves color names for Allegro RIP and the output device by mapping<br />

the names of the colors that Allegro RIP finds in the file being processed to<br />

the color names of the media that the output device uses to image a digital<br />

halftone proof.


C<br />

C<br />

Proof Color Mapping Table Spectrum Devices 51<br />

Orange<br />

K<br />

Y<br />

M<br />

C<br />

Separated PostScript<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong><br />

Allegro<br />

RIP<br />

Allegro RIP reports color names to<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

Allegro RIP<br />

interprets color names:<br />

{<br />

Cyan<br />

Magenta<br />

Yellow<br />

Black<br />

Orange<br />

RIP Color<br />

Black<br />

Cyan<br />

Magenta<br />

Yellow<br />

Orange<br />

Device Color<br />

Black<br />

Cyan<br />

Magenta<br />

Yellow<br />

Orange<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> matches color<br />

names to RIP color names in proof<br />

color mapping table<br />

Color name not in<br />

color matching table<br />

Color names match<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

prompts you to add color to<br />

color mapping table and<br />

map it to a device color<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> uses<br />

device color name in color<br />

mapping to instruct the<br />

output device<br />

Trendse ter<br />

Spectrum<br />

Figure 20: Digital halftone proofing and color name matching


C<br />

C<br />

52 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

RIP-to-Disk and RIP-to-Plate Modes<br />

Allegro RIP features two RIP modes: RIP-to-disk and RIP-to-plate. In<br />

order to choose the RIP mode that best suits your workflow, you need to<br />

understand the flow of PostScript and raster data through a <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

system.<br />

Note: RIP-to-plate is the default mode when <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> is installed.<br />

This section contains five parts:<br />

• What is RIP-to-disk mode?<br />

• What is RIP-to-plate mode?<br />

• RIP-to-disk and RIP-to-plate modes compared<br />

• possible time advantages for each mode<br />

• key differences between modes<br />

What Is RIP-to-Disk Mode?<br />

Input<br />

PostScript file<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

RAM<br />

Interprets<br />

Output<br />

Raster is sent to<br />

device for imaging<br />

Spool<br />

Renders<br />

Screens<br />

RIP interprets,<br />

renders, and<br />

screens file in RAM<br />

(page buffer is<br />

saved to disk)<br />

Load Media<br />

command<br />

Saved on disk<br />

Page buffer<br />

Page buffer<br />

Page buffer<br />

Trendse ter<br />

Media<br />

Output Device<br />

Figure 21: Data flow in RIP-to-disk mode


RIP-to-Disk and RIP-to-Plate Modes 53<br />

Possible Advantages of RIP-to-Disk Mode<br />

Advantage: Time Savings<br />

RIP-to-disk mode lets you RIP multiple files without immediately<br />

outputting the raster data. It can be an efficient mode because it doesn’t<br />

require you to be at the output device for the RIPing process.<br />

Considerations:<br />

• <strong>Trendsetter</strong> use in your shop<br />

If your shop normally operates a <strong>Trendsetter</strong> continuously throughout<br />

a shift and/or 24 hours a day, RIP-to-disk mode will not save you time.<br />

If you can afford to have a <strong>Trendsetter</strong> idle for certain periods<br />

throughout the day, RIP-to-disk mode may be better, because it frees<br />

you to do other work while files are being RIPed.<br />

• storage capacity<br />

If you don’t have enough storage capacity on the hard disk of your<br />

Allegro workstation for several jobs’ worth of raster data, you will not<br />

benefit from RIP-to-disk mode.<br />

To purchase additional hard disk space, contact a service representative.<br />

• SMP workstations<br />

You can simultaneously RIP-to-disk and output files that have been<br />

previously RIPed and saved as page buffers on disk.<br />

• re-order color separations for digital halftone proofing<br />

Advantage: Fast Remakes<br />

RIP-to-disk mode allows for instant remakes, so this mode can produce<br />

remakes faster, depending on the files and whether the page buffers are still<br />

on disk (that is, not automatically removed to free disk space).<br />

Considerations:<br />

• Complexity of jobs<br />

If you’re doing simple black and white jobs, remakes are probably<br />

equally fast with either RIP mode. If you’re doing remakes of more<br />

complex CMYK jobs, remakes can be faster in RIP-to-disk mode.


C<br />

C<br />

54 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

What Is RIP-to-Plate Mode?<br />

Input<br />

PostScript file<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

RAM<br />

Interprets<br />

Spool<br />

Renders<br />

Screens<br />

Output<br />

Raster is sent to<br />

device for imaging<br />

RIP interprets,<br />

renders, and<br />

screens file in RAM<br />

(page buffer is not<br />

saved to disk)<br />

Load Media<br />

command<br />

Trendse ter<br />

Media<br />

Output Device<br />

Figure 22: Data flow in RIP-to-plate mode<br />

Possible Advantages of RIP-to-Plate Mode<br />

Advantage: Time Savings<br />

RIP-to-plate mode can save time, because it doesn’t require you to save<br />

RIPed files to workstation’s hard disk before imaging them onto media in<br />

the output device.<br />

Considerations:<br />

• complexity of jobs<br />

It depends on the PostScript files for the job—if complex files are being<br />

imaged, remakes take longer, because the PostScript files must be RIPed<br />

a second time.<br />

Advantage: Less Storage Required<br />

Not as much hard disk space is required with RIP-to-plate mode, because<br />

raster data is not written to the hard disk of the workstation.


RIP-to-Disk and RIP-to-Plate Modes 55<br />

RIP-to-Disk and RIP-to-Plate Modes Compared<br />

Figure 23 provides a simplified illustration of the steps involved in<br />

processing PostScript data through a <strong>Trendsetter</strong> system and onto media.<br />

The illustration shows both RIP modes.<br />

RIP-to-disk<br />

Step 1 Step 2 Step 3<br />

Interprets, renders,<br />

and screens the<br />

PostScript<br />

Compresses (optional)<br />

and writes the page<br />

buffer to the hard disk<br />

of the workstation<br />

The output device images<br />

the raster data<br />

onto media<br />

RIP-to-plate<br />

Step 1 Step 2<br />

Interprets, renders, Page buffers are sent to the device to<br />

and screens the Post- output on the media<br />

Script<br />

Figure 23: Data flow: RIP-to-disk versus RIP-to-plate<br />

Page Buffers<br />

Page buffers are produced in both RIP-to-disk and RIP-to-plate mode, but<br />

they are used differently.<br />

In RIP-to-plate mode, the page buffer is held in RAM or paged out to disk,<br />

depending on the complexity of the PostScript file and the amount of<br />

memory available for the RIP. After the entire PostScript file is rasterized,<br />

the page buffer is immediately sent to the output device and then removed<br />

from disk (if it was necessary to page it out to disk), and deleted from<br />

RAM.<br />

In RIP-to-disk mode, the page buffer is saved to disk in the page buffer<br />

directory as specified in the Configure RIP dialog box. Page buffers can be<br />

compressed or not, according to how the RIP is configured. We<br />

recommend that page buffers always be compressed.


56 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

Possible Time Advantages for Each Mode<br />

Step 1 in Figure 23 on page 55 takes the same amount of time for both RIP<br />

modes in most cases.<br />

Step 2 in RIP-to-disk mode does not happen with RIP-to-plate mode.<br />

Therefore, RIP-to-plate mode could be faster, because this step is skipped.<br />

However, it’s unnecessary for an operator to be at the workstation during<br />

Steps 1 and 2.<br />

Step 3 is faster in RIP-to-plate mode, because you don’t have to wait for the<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> to read data from the disk.<br />

Note: RIP-to-disk mode allows overlap of data interpretation and imaging.<br />

However, RIPing one file to disk while imaging another file from the disk requires<br />

an SMP workstation, that is, multiple CPUs.<br />

The Allegro workstation processor speed and amount of RAM are also<br />

factors: the faster the processor, the faster the RIP, and the better the chance<br />

that <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> will be able to process files at the engine speed of<br />

a <strong>Trendsetter</strong> output device.<br />

Key Differences Between Modes<br />

RIP-to-disk mode may be no faster from beginning to end than RIP-toplate<br />

mode, but it can save time, because it leaves you free to do other work<br />

while files are being RIPed and saved to disk. You could, for example,<br />

submit all the files for a job to be RIPed at the end of the day, then return<br />

in the morning to image the media.


Input Channels 57<br />

Input Channels<br />

This section contains four parts:<br />

• What is an input channel?<br />

• How are input channels used?<br />

• How are input channels managed?<br />

• What is start inputs?<br />

What Is an Input Channel?<br />

An input channel is a job submission mechanism, that is, a mechanism<br />

that lets you submit PostScript files to <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> for processing.<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> supports the following input channels:<br />

• AppleTalk<br />

• NT pipe<br />

• socket input<br />

• spool folders<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> supports all the input channels supported by Allegro<br />

RIP.<br />

For more information on NT pipes, see the description of using named pipes in<br />

the Allegro RIP Reference <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

The most common input channels used with <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> are:<br />

• spool folders<br />

• AppleTalk<br />

Spool folders let you submit files using a network. You can locate the<br />

desired spool folder in Windows Explorer, and drop the files into the spool<br />

folder. Each spool folder must have a page setup associated with it.<br />

Spool folder configuration also lets you configure error and completed<br />

folders to manage your PostScript files.<br />

AppleTalk lets <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> accept input files from any AppleTalk<br />

network to which the workstation is connected. Any users on the<br />

AppleTalk network can print PostScript files to <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> by<br />

selecting the AppleTalk input channel in their Chooser. You can have<br />

multiple AppleTalk input channels, each with a different page setup.


58 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

How Are Input Channels Used?<br />

How Are Input Channels Managed?<br />

Other, less common, input channels available are:<br />

• serial port—allows PCs to be connected via their serial ports<br />

• socket plugin—allows <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> to accept input from a<br />

socket client program, and supports TCP/IP and UNIX socket<br />

protocols<br />

These input channels are not discussed in this manual. For more information, see<br />

the Allegro RIP Reference <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

Input channels are used to submit PostScript files to <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>.<br />

You must attach a page setup to each input, and when you submit files to<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> via the input, the software uses the instructions in the<br />

page setup to process the incoming PostScript file.<br />

We recommend that you create a separate input for each job type that you<br />

process, and that you attach a specialized page setup to each input.<br />

Input channels are managed using the Input Controller dialog box. You<br />

display this dialog box by selecting Input Controller from the Allegro RIP<br />

menu.<br />

Use the Input Controller dialog box to create, edit, copy, and delete input<br />

channels. The Input Controller dialog box lists the names of all the input<br />

channels you have configured, as well as the type of each input, whether or<br />

not it is enabled, the name of the page setup attached to it, and the status.<br />

You can leave the Input Controller dialog box displayed and use it to<br />

manage input channels by turning them on and off. Using the Input<br />

Controller dialog box, you can turn specific input channels on and off,<br />

unlike the Start Inputs command, which instructs Allegro RIP to scan or<br />

not scan input channels for incoming PostScript files. See also Table 2 on<br />

page 60.


Input Channels 59<br />

What Is Start Inputs?<br />

Figure 24: Input Controller dialog box<br />

Input Channel Status<br />

The Input Controller dialog box lets you monitor the status of your input<br />

channels.<br />

There are three possible states for the input channel:<br />

• Active<br />

The input channel is enabled, inputs are turned on, and a PostScript file<br />

is currently being processed.<br />

• Idle<br />

The input channel is enabled, inputs are turned on, and the channel is<br />

not currently processing PostScript files.<br />

• Stopped<br />

The input channel is enabled, but inputs are turned off. PostScript files<br />

cannot be processed using the input channel.<br />

Start Inputs is a command on the Allegro RIP menu that instructs Allegro<br />

RIP whether or not to scan enabled input channels—that is, input<br />

channels that are turned on to accept incoming PostScript files. You select<br />

Start Inputs when you’re submitting PostScript files to <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong>, and you clear Start Inputs when you’re configuring Allegro RIP<br />

or maintaining the output device.<br />

Attention: Unless Start Inputs is selected under the Allegro RIP menu,<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> does not automatically scan enabled input channels for<br />

incoming data. Input channels must be enabled to be available as<br />

communication channels. For details, see Start Inputs on page 14.


60 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

Table 2 on page 60 compares the Input Controller dialog box to the Start<br />

Inputs command. The Input Controller dialog box lets you enable and<br />

disable individual input channels. The Start Inputs command instructs<br />

Allegro RIP whether or not to scan enabled input channels for incoming<br />

PostScript files. In other words, Start Inputs is a global setting that turns<br />

file scanning on or off for all enabled input channels.<br />

Table 2: Input Controller dialog box versus Start Inputs command<br />

RIP menu<br />

Input Controller dialog box<br />

Inputs Input channels enabled Status<br />

On Input channel 1 is ON Active or<br />

Idle<br />

Result<br />

Files processed<br />

Input channel 2 is OFF Stopped No files<br />

processed<br />

Off<br />

Input channel 3 is ON<br />

Input channel 1 is ON<br />

Input channel 2 is OFF<br />

Input channel 3 is ON<br />

Active or<br />

Idle<br />

Stopped<br />

Files processed<br />

No files<br />

processed


Device-specific PPD Files 61<br />

Device-specific PPD Files<br />

What Is the PPD File?<br />

This section contains four parts:<br />

• What is the PPD file?<br />

• How are PPD files used?<br />

• How are PPD files used with desktop applications?<br />

• When should I generate the PPD file?<br />

A device-specific PostScript printer description (PPD) file defines the<br />

capabilities of the CreoScitex-developed output device to which<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> is connected. It contains specific information about<br />

the features supported by the output device and the options available for<br />

each feature.<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> also automatically creates PPX files when it generates<br />

PPD files. PPX files are Preps-specific and contain virtual punch<br />

coordinate information.<br />

PPD files include the proof types and plate types you configured in<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>. PPD files also include the name of the output device<br />

to which <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> is connected. You can select proof types and<br />

plate types in imposition software, and the software inserts the selected<br />

option into the file it generates. <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> reads incoming files to<br />

find the option you selected in your imposition software, and <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong> uses this information during file processing.<br />

PPD files contain the following media-independent information:<br />

• image resolution<br />

• recommended spot functions<br />

• screening angles


62 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

How Are PPD Files Used?<br />

The plate types and proof types in the PPD file specify:<br />

• image orientation<br />

• media size<br />

• area of the media to be imaged<br />

• medium indices (only if you select the Add Medium Index to PPD<br />

check box in the <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box)<br />

PPD and PPX files are used by imposition software to present you with the<br />

options supported by the output device, such as proof types or plate types<br />

and output device names. You can select these options in your imposition<br />

software, and the software inserts the selected options into the file it<br />

generates.<br />

For the PPD and PPX files to be available to your imposition workstation,<br />

you must copy these files to the workstation via a network or using floppy<br />

disks. If you are using Preps, you must copy the PPX file to the Preps \ppd<br />

folder. See Making PPD and PPX Files Available to Your Imposition Software<br />

on page 143.<br />

If your shop has more than one CreoScitex-developed output device, you<br />

must generate a PPD file for each output device. If two output devices<br />

share the same default PPD file name, two PPD files will be generated with<br />

the same name. You should give at least one of the PPD files a unique name<br />

to differentiate between them.<br />

Before renaming files, you should determine what file naming conventions<br />

are required by your imposition software and by the operating system on<br />

your imposition workstation. Some imposition software applications and<br />

operating systems require an 8-character file name with a 3-character<br />

extension. To confirm the file naming conventions you should use, refer to<br />

your imposition software user guide and your operating system user guide.


Device-specific PPD Files 63<br />

How Are PPD Files Used With Desktop Applications?<br />

Note: The PPD file options described in this section are specific to desktop<br />

applications, such as QuarkXPress. They do not affect imposition software, such<br />

as Preps.<br />

When you copy the PPD file generated by <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> to your<br />

Macintosh, you can set several output device options in your desktop<br />

applications.<br />

For example, when you copy the PPD file to the Systems Folder on your<br />

Macintosh, then make the PPD file available to QuarkXPress, you can set<br />

the following output device options in QuarkXPress when you generate<br />

PostScript files:<br />

• Resolution<br />

• MirrorPrint<br />

• NegativePrint<br />

• Separations<br />

Use the Resolution option to select a resolution. For the MirrorPrint,<br />

NegativePrint, and Separations options, you can select one of the<br />

following three settings:<br />

• RIP default<br />

• False<br />

• True<br />

When the desktop application—such as QuarkXPress—generates a<br />

PostScript file, the setting you selected is included in the PostScript file<br />

comments. When Allegro RIP processes the PostScript file, it interprets the<br />

comments in the PostScript file and reads the Allegro RIP page setup to<br />

determine how to process the PostScript file.<br />

When you select the RIP default setting for an option, Allegro RIP<br />

processes the PostScript file according to the option setting in the selected<br />

page setup. For example, if you set MirrorPrint to RIP default in<br />

QuarkXPress when generating a PostScript file, then submit the PostScript<br />

file to <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>, Allegro RIP interprets the PostScript file and<br />

finds the MirrorPrint option set to RIP default, so it uses the Mirrorprint<br />

setting in the Allegro RIP page setup.


64 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

When you select the False setting for an option, the option is disabled in<br />

the PostScript file comments and Allegro RIP interprets the option as<br />

disabled. For example, if you set MirrorPrint to False in QuarkXPress when<br />

generating a PostScript file and submit the PostScript file to <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong>, Allegro RIP interprets the PostScript file and finds the MirrorPrint<br />

option set to False. Allegro RIP does not mirrorprint the file, regardless of<br />

the Mirrorprint setting in the Allegro RIP page setup.<br />

Note: You can instruct Allegro RIP to override a False setting in a PostScript file.<br />

To override the False setting, add the OverMirrorPrint.ps page feature to the<br />

page setup you’re using to process the PostScript file. This Allegro RIP page<br />

feature overrides the PostScript file comments.<br />

When you select the True setting, the option is enabled in the PostScript file<br />

comments, and Allegro RIP interprets the option as enabled. For example,<br />

if you set MirrorPrint to True in QuarkXPress when generating a PostScript<br />

file, then submit the PostScript file to <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>, Allegro RIP<br />

finds the MirrorPrint option set to True, so it mirrorprints the file,<br />

regardless of the Mirrorprint setting in the Allegro RIP page setup.<br />

Table 3: Summary of Allegro RIP default settings<br />

Option<br />

Setting selected in desktop application for option<br />

RIP Default False True<br />

MirrorPrint<br />

NegativePrint<br />

Separations<br />

Allegro RIP<br />

uses option<br />

setting<br />

specified in<br />

selected page<br />

setup.<br />

Option is<br />

disabled in<br />

PostScript<br />

comments.<br />

Allegro RIP<br />

does not<br />

perform<br />

option. You<br />

can override<br />

this setting by<br />

using a page<br />

feature in<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong>.<br />

Option is<br />

enabled in<br />

PostScript<br />

comments.<br />

Allegro RIP<br />

performs<br />

option.<br />

You can<br />

override this<br />

setting by using<br />

a page feature<br />

in <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong>.


Device-specific PPD Files 65<br />

When Should I Generate the PPD File?<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> automatically generates PPD and PPX files when you<br />

start <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>. You should also generate a new PPD file:<br />

• after a service representative adds or deletes a media type on your<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> system<br />

• when you add a new plate type or proof type<br />

• when you change the load orientation in an existing plate type or proof<br />

type<br />

• when you delete a plate type or proof type<br />

• when you change a spot function or frequency information in the<br />

Configure PPD dialog box<br />

• after creating a custom medium index number in a plate type or proof<br />

type<br />

• to make it (the PPD file) available to Harmony.<br />

For more information on PPD files and Harmony, see the Harmony Reference<br />

<strong>Guide</strong> for iMPAct Workflow.<br />

If you don’t generate a new PPD file and make it available to your<br />

imposition software, new additions or changes won’t be available for<br />

selection in the imposition software.<br />

By default, PPD and PPX files are stored in the \allegro folder on the drive<br />

where <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> is installed. You may change the default storage<br />

folder if desired.


66 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

Output Controller/Monitor Window<br />

Note: The Output Controller/Monitor window is only available when Allegro RIP<br />

is in RIP-to-disk mode. See Page Buffers on page 55.<br />

This section contains two parts:<br />

• What is the Output Controller/Monitor window?<br />

• How is the Output Controller/Monitor window used?<br />

What Is the Output Controller/Monitor Window?<br />

The Output Controller/Monitor window lets you manage page buffers. A<br />

page buffer is a rasterized data that is ready to be sent to the output device<br />

for imaging. Page buffer formats differ between versions of the RIP, so a<br />

buffer from an older version (for example, Allegro RIP 4.1) will not work<br />

with the current version (for example, Allegro RIP 5.1). For the difference<br />

between how page buffers are used in RIP-to-disk and RIP-to-plate mode,<br />

see RIP-to-Disk and RIP-to-Plate Modes on page 52.<br />

To display the Output Controller (if it is not already displayed), select<br />

Output Controller from the Output menu, or type CTRL+O. It will appear<br />

as a separate window on your screen, as shown in Figure 25 on page 66. If<br />

you want to remove it, simply choose the menu option again. By default,<br />

the Output Controller dialog box displays when you start <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong> if it is configured for RIP-to-disk mode.<br />

How Is the Output Controller/Monitor Window Used?<br />

Active Queue<br />

Current Queue<br />

Held Queue<br />

Figure 25: Output Controller/Monitor window


Output Controller/Monitor Window 67<br />

You use the Output Controller/Monitor window to manage files that have<br />

been RIPed to disk. The Active Queue and Held Queue in the Output<br />

Controller can contain a number of items, each representing a page buffer<br />

of output.<br />

The Active Queue contains page buffers which are currently queued for<br />

imaging. Page buffers listed at the top of the Active Queue are printed first.<br />

The Held Queue contains page buffers that <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> is holding<br />

on your hard disk. They may have already been imaged, or they may be<br />

waiting to be imaged.<br />

The number of items in a queue, together with the amount of disk space<br />

they use, is displayed below each queue.<br />

If a page buffer is currently being imaged, it is shown in the box at the top<br />

of the Output Controller between the Active Queue and Held Queue. This<br />

box is unlabeled, but it is referred to as the Current Queue.<br />

As page buffers are imaged, there is a constant flow from the Active Queue<br />

to the Held Queue. After a PostScript file is interpreted and rasterized, the<br />

page buffer is placed at the end of the Active Queue, imaged in turn, and<br />

then transferred to the Held Queue, where it will be retained according to<br />

the value selected in the Delete box. Page buffers will be deleted from the<br />

Held Queue according to the Delete value selected (for example, Always,<br />

Never, or When Necessary). The Delete value is used when there is not<br />

enough space to write the buffer to disk.<br />

The Disable output check box can be used at any time to stop imaging.<br />

When it is selected, rasterized page buffers remain in the Active Queue<br />

until you clear the check box to resume imaging.<br />

Disable output does not stop the imaging for the rasterized page buffer in<br />

the Current Queue, if there is one. To stop imaging for a rasterized page<br />

buffer, drag the rasterized page buffer name from the Current Queue into<br />

the Held Queue or Active Queue.<br />

If PostScript files are interpreted while the Disable output check box is<br />

selected, the new rasterized page buffers are added to the Active Queue as<br />

normal. Disabling output does not prevent you from RIPing jobs.<br />

You will find Disable output useful if you need to reload media in an<br />

output device, or if there is a fault at the output device, but you wish to<br />

continue interpreting PostScript files and preparing rasterized page buffers<br />

for imaging.<br />

Note: Allegro RIP automatically disables output when certain output device<br />

errors occur.


68 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts<br />

Allegro Window<br />

This section contains two parts:<br />

• What is the Allegro window?<br />

• How is the Allegro window used?<br />

What Is the Allegro Window?<br />

The Allegro window is the main window of <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>. It<br />

contains the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> menu and toolbar. It also contains<br />

Allegro RIP information and error messages. It provides details about files<br />

that fail, including the name of the file and the line of PostScript code that<br />

caused the failure.<br />

Figure 26: Allegro window<br />

How Is the Allegro Window Used?<br />

The Allegro window is used to communicate information about Allegro<br />

RIP processing, including error messages.


<strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor Window 69<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor Window<br />

This section contains two parts:<br />

• What is the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor window?<br />

• How is the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor window used?<br />

What Is the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor Window?<br />

Also called the Message Log, the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor window contains<br />

information about the output device to which <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> is<br />

connected. It provides detailed messages about the status of your output<br />

device and about the progress of files as they are sent to the output device<br />

and imaged. These messages time each image’s progress in the output<br />

device, and show you the percentage of total imaging completed.<br />

Note: The <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor window can contain a maximum of 500 lines of<br />

text.<br />

Figure 27: <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor window<br />

How Is the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor Window Used?<br />

The <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor window is used to communicate information,<br />

including error messages, about the output device to which <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong> is connected.


70 Chapter 3 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Concepts


4<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong><br />

Reference<br />

Overview ..........................................................................................72<br />

<strong>Configuration</strong> Dialog Box..................................................................73<br />

Media <strong>Configuration</strong> Dialog Box .......................................................75<br />

Plate Definition Dialog Box................................................................76<br />

Proof Definition Dialog Box ...............................................................79<br />

Configure Proof Color Mappings Dialog Box .....................................84<br />

Save PPD File Dialog Box ...................................................................86<br />

Spool Folder <strong>Configuration</strong> Dialog Box..............................................94


72 Chapter 4 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Reference<br />

Overview<br />

This chapter describes the options in the dialog boxes used to configure the<br />

portions of <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> other than Allegro RIP. Use this chapter to<br />

understand the definition of each option, and use the procedures in the<br />

following two chapters to configure <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>:<br />

• Chapter 5, System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

• Chapter 6, Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Dialog boxes that lead you through a process but don’t require you to set<br />

an option are not described in this chapter. See Chapter 5, System<br />

<strong>Configuration</strong> or Chapter 6, Job <strong>Configuration</strong> for procedures on using the<br />

dialog boxes, including dialog boxes not described in this chapter.


<strong>Configuration</strong> Dialog Box 73<br />

<strong>Configuration</strong> Dialog Box<br />

You can access the <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box by selecting Workstation<br />

<strong>Configuration</strong> from the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu.<br />

Figure 28: <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box<br />

Use the Units section to select a unit of measurement for <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong>. You can choose between Millimeters and Inches.<br />

Select the Add Medium Index to PPD check box to include medium index<br />

numbers in the PPD file that <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> generates. Clear this<br />

check box if you don’t want medium index numbers included in the PPD<br />

file.<br />

Select the Manual Plate/Proof Selection check box to enable manual plate<br />

type or proof type selection. Clear this check box to enable automatic plate<br />

type or proof type selection.<br />

During manual plate type or proof type selection, <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

displays a dialog box listing all configured plate types or proof types on<br />

which the image can fit, and you must select one for the software to<br />

continue processing the job. With automatic plate type or proof type<br />

selection, <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> automatically selects a plate type or proof<br />

type for you, according to the instructions in the PostScript file.<br />

Select the Manual Proof Eject check box to enable the Eject Proof<br />

command on the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu—that is, manual proof eject. (You<br />

must restart <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> for the change to take effect.) Manual<br />

proof eject is available only in RIP-to-disk mode and when processing


74 Chapter 4 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Reference<br />

pre-separated or separated PostScript files to create digital halftone proofs.<br />

After all proof colors image, select Eject Proof to eject the receptor from the<br />

drum in the output device.<br />

If the Manual Proof Eject check box is cleared, automatic proof eject is<br />

enabled by default. Automatic proof eject is available only in RIP-to-plate<br />

mode.<br />

Note: CreoScitex can adjust the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> registry so that you no<br />

longer need to restart <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> after selecting or clearing the Manual<br />

Proof Eject check box in the <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box. However, Eject Proof<br />

always displays on the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, even when it is disabled. If you select<br />

Eject Proof when it is disabled, an error message displays, informing you the<br />

command cannot be executed.<br />

Your Allegro RIP dongle number displays beside Allegro Dongle Security<br />

Code.<br />

The Allegro Software License Key must be entered during installation of<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>. If this box is empty, either because it was not entered<br />

at this time, or you have reinstalled the software, contact your service<br />

representative.<br />

You use the PrintLink Software License Key box to activate PrintLink<br />

software. To activate the software, type your PrintLink license key number<br />

in the PrintLink License Key box. Contact your service representative to<br />

obtain your license key number.<br />

Note: If you’re not using PrintLink, you do not use this option.<br />

You use the Staccato Software License Key box to activate Staccato<br />

software. To activate the software, type your Staccato license key number in<br />

the Staccato Software License Key box. Contact your service<br />

representative to obtain your license key number.<br />

Note: If you’re not using Staccato, you do not use this option.<br />

Buttons Available<br />

This section describes the buttons in the <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box.<br />

Button<br />

OK<br />

Description<br />

Click the OK button to save the changes made in the<br />

<strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box and to close the dialog box.


Media <strong>Configuration</strong> Dialog Box 75<br />

Media <strong>Configuration</strong> Dialog Box<br />

The Media <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box is displayed by selecting Media<br />

<strong>Configuration</strong> from the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu.<br />

Figure 29: Media <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box<br />

The Available Media box lists all the media types configured in the output<br />

device. You must select a media type from this list before you can add<br />

information to the Medium Index box or before information displays in<br />

the Laser Exposure box.<br />

Note: The information displayed in the Laser Exposure box is display only; you<br />

cannot change it.<br />

Use the Medium Index box to specify a medium index number for the<br />

media type you selected in the Available Media box. The medium index<br />

number that you specify here is the default medium index number for the<br />

media.<br />

See the Allegro RIP Reference <strong>Guide</strong> for a list of default medium index numbers<br />

by media type.<br />

Buttons Available<br />

This section describes the buttons in the Media <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box.<br />

Button<br />

OK<br />

Cancel<br />

Description<br />

Click the OK button to save the changes made in the<br />

Media <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box. Two warning<br />

messages appear when you change the value of the<br />

medium index. Click OK to continue.<br />

Click the Cancel button to discard changes made in<br />

the Media <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box and close the<br />

dialog box.


76 Chapter 4 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Reference<br />

Plate Definition Dialog Box<br />

You can access the Plate Definition dialog box by selecting Plate Definition<br />

from the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu.<br />

Figure 30: Plate Definition dialog box<br />

The Available Plates box lists all the plate types configured in the system.<br />

When you select a plate type, all the other options on this dialog box<br />

display information about the selected plate type.<br />

Buttons Available<br />

This section describes the buttons in the Plate Definition dialog box.<br />

Table 4: Buttons in the Plate Definition dialog box<br />

Button<br />

New<br />

Edit<br />

Delete<br />

Done<br />

Description<br />

Click the New button to display the Plate Type<br />

Specifications dialog box and create a new plate type.<br />

See Plate Type Specifications Dialog Box on page 77.<br />

Select a plate type, then click the Edit button to display<br />

the Plate Type Specifications dialog box and edit the<br />

selected plate type.<br />

Select a plate type, then click the Delete button to delete<br />

the selected plate type.<br />

Click the Done button to save the changes you’ve made<br />

in the Plate definition dialog box and close the dialog<br />

box.


Plate Definition Dialog Box 77<br />

Plate Type Specifications Dialog Box<br />

You can display the Plate Type Specifications dialog box in two ways:<br />

• clicking the New button in the Plate Definition dialog box<br />

• selecting a plate type in the Plate Definition dialog box, then clicking<br />

the Edit button<br />

Figure 31: Plate Type Specifications dialog box<br />

Use the Plate Name box to type a unique name for the plate type.<br />

Note: The following characters cannot be used in a plate type name: spaces,<br />

colons [:], forward slashes [/], back slashes [\], parentheses [()], or quotation marks<br />

["].<br />

Use the Media Type to select a media type on which to base the plate type.<br />

Use the Around Drum box to specify the dimension of the medium when it<br />

is loaded around the drum. This could be either the width or length of the<br />

medium, depending on the load orientation and size of the medium. For<br />

example, when a 32" x 44" plate is loaded sideways, 32" is the dimension<br />

that will be loaded around the drum.<br />

Around the<br />

drum<br />

Along the drum<br />

0, 0<br />

Figure 32: Around the drum versus along the drum


78 Chapter 4 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Reference<br />

Use the Along Drum box to specify the dimension of the medium when it<br />

is loaded under the leading edge clamp—along the drum. This could be<br />

either the width or length of the medium, depending on the load<br />

orientation and size of the medium. For example, when a 32" x 44" plate is<br />

loaded sideways, 44" is the dimension loaded along the drum.<br />

In the Thickness box, type the thickness of the output media, then select a<br />

unit of measurement, inches or millimeters.<br />

Note: The Laser Exposure option is display only (that is, the value cannot be<br />

changed in this dialog box).<br />

The Medium Index box displays the medium index number you specified<br />

in the Media Type dialog box. Select the Use Media’s check box to use the<br />

medium index number configured in the output device and displayed in<br />

the Media <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box. Clear the Use Media’s check box to<br />

specify a custom medium index number that is different from the one<br />

displayed in the Media <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box.<br />

Buttons Available<br />

This section describes the buttons in the Plate Type Specifications dialog<br />

box.<br />

Button<br />

OK<br />

Cancel<br />

PrintLink<br />

Description<br />

Click the OK button to save the changes made in the<br />

Plate Type Specifications dialog box and close the dialog<br />

box.<br />

Click the Cancel button to discard all changes made in<br />

the Plate Type Specifications dialog box and close the<br />

dialog box.<br />

Click the PrintLink button to display the Configure<br />

PrintLink dialog box and configure PrintLink. The<br />

PrintLink button is only available when you have<br />

PrintLink licensed on your system.


Proof Definition Dialog Box 79<br />

Proof Definition Dialog Box<br />

You can access the Proof Definition dialog box by selecting Proof Type<br />

from the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu.<br />

Figure 33: Proof Definition dialog box<br />

The Available Proofs box lists all the proof types configured in the system.<br />

When you select a proof type, all the other options on this dialog box<br />

display information about the selected proof type.<br />

Buttons Available<br />

This section describes the buttons in the Proof Definition dialog box.<br />

Table 5: Buttons in the Proof Definition dialog box<br />

Button<br />

New<br />

Edit<br />

Delete<br />

Done<br />

Description<br />

Click the New button to display the Proof Type<br />

Specifications dialog box and create a new proof type.<br />

See Proof Type Specifications Dialog Box on page 80.<br />

Select a proof type, then click the Edit button to display<br />

the Proof Type Specifications dialog box and edit the<br />

selected proof type.<br />

Select a proof type, then click the Delete button to<br />

delete the selected proof type.<br />

Click the Done button to save the changes made in the<br />

Proof definition dialog box and close the dialog box.


80 Chapter 4 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Reference<br />

Proof Type Specifications Dialog Box<br />

You can display the Proof Type Specifications dialog box in two ways:<br />

• clicking the New button in the Proof Definition dialog box<br />

• selecting a proof type in the Proof Definition dialog box, then clicking<br />

the Edit button<br />

Figure 34: Proof Type Specifications dialog box<br />

Use the Proof Name box to type a unique name for the proof type.<br />

Use the Media Type box to select a media type on which to base the proof<br />

type.<br />

Use the Proof Size box to select a size for your proof type. Proof sizes are<br />

configured in the output device. You cannot change them.<br />

When you select a proof size, <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> automatically completes<br />

the Around Drum and Along Drum boxes for you. These dimensions are<br />

configured in the output device. You cannot change them unless you<br />

selected Other in the Proof Size box. Other is used to enter the nonstandard<br />

size in the Around Drum and Along Drum boxes. From this<br />

information and other factors, <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> determines which<br />

preconfigured proof size that it will use.<br />

See also Orientation for Four-Up Layouts for the Four-Up Cassette on<br />

page 82 and Figure 36 on page 83.<br />

The Around Drum box displays the dimension of the medium when it is<br />

loaded around the drum. This could be either the width or length of the<br />

medium, depending on the load orientation and size of the medium.


Proof Definition Dialog Box 81<br />

Around the<br />

drum<br />

Along the drum<br />

0, 0<br />

Figure 35: Around the drum versus along the drum<br />

The Along Drum box displays the dimension of the medium when it is<br />

loaded under the leading edge clamp—along the drum. This could be<br />

either the width or length of the medium, depending on the load<br />

orientation of the medium.<br />

The Medium Index box displays the medium index number you specified<br />

in the Media Type dialog box. Select the Use Media’s check box to use the<br />

medium index number configured in the output device and displayed in<br />

the Media <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box. Clear the Use Media’s check box to<br />

specify a medium index number that is different from the one displayed in<br />

the Media <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box.<br />

Buttons Available<br />

This section describes the buttons in the Proof Type Specifications dialog<br />

box.<br />

Table 6: Buttons in the Proof Type Specifications dialog box<br />

Button<br />

OK<br />

Cancel<br />

Description<br />

Click the OK button to save the changes made in the<br />

Proof Type Specifications dialog box and close the<br />

dialog box.<br />

Click the Cancel button to discard all changes made in<br />

the Proof Type Specifications dialog box and close the<br />

dialog box.


82 Chapter 4 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Reference<br />

Orientation for Four-Up Layouts for the Four-Up Cassette<br />

When you print PostScript of a portrait QuarkXPress document to a fourup<br />

cassette on a Spectrum digital halftone proofing system, you select the<br />

landscape (or rotated 90 degrees) Orientation option in the Page Setup<br />

dialog box in QuarkXPress 3.32 (in the Print dialog box in QuarkXPress<br />

4.0).<br />

When you print PostScript of a landscape QuarkXPress document to a<br />

four-up cassette on a Spectrum digital halftone proofing system, you select<br />

the portrait Orientation option in the Page Setup dialog box in<br />

QuarkXPress 3.32 (in the Print dialog box in QuarkXPress 4.0).<br />

The printing of QuarkXPress documents to four-up media is best<br />

explained by examining how the media from the four-up cassette is<br />

wrapped around the drum and imaged on a Spectrum digital halftone<br />

proofing system. When a four-up cassette is loaded on a <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

Spectrum or Proofsetter Spectrum, it appears to be portrait in orientation.<br />

However, when the media is loaded on the drum, the long edge wraps<br />

around the drum, and the media is imaged along the drum.<br />

Therefore, PostScript from a four-up portrait QuarkXPress document<br />

must be printed to a Spectrum digital halftone proofing system with<br />

landscape (rotated 90 degrees) Orientation option selected in the Page<br />

Setup dialog box in QuarkXPress 3.32 (in the Print dialog box in<br />

QuarkXPress 4.0).<br />

PostScript of a four-up landscape QuarkXPress document must be printed<br />

to a Spectrum digital halftone proofing system with portrait Orientation<br />

option selected.<br />

See Figure 36 on page 83 for a graphical representation of this concept.<br />

Orientation for Eight-Up Layouts for the Eight-Up Cassette<br />

When printing PostScript of eight-up documents from QuarkXPress to an<br />

eight-up cassette on a Spectrum digital halftone proofing system, you<br />

select the Orientation option in the Page Setup dialog box in QuarkXPress<br />

3.32 (in the Print dialog box in QuarkXPress 4.0) that matches your page<br />

setup. For example, for portrait documents, you select portrait<br />

orientation; for landscape documents, you select landscape (rotated 90<br />

degrees) orientation.


Proof Definition Dialog Box 83<br />

Figure 36: Printing four-up layouts to a four-up proofing cassette


84 Chapter 4 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Reference<br />

Configure Proof Color Mappings Dialog Box<br />

Note: The proof color mapping table is only used for digital halftone proofing;<br />

it is not used for platemaking or film-making.<br />

You can access the Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box by<br />

selecting Proof Color Mapping from the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu.<br />

Figure 37: Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box<br />

From the Device medium box, select a media type. Only media types used<br />

for digital halftone proofing are displayed in the Configure Proof Color<br />

Mappings dialog box. The proof color mapping table box displays the color<br />

mappings configured for the selected media type.<br />

The proof color mapping table contains two columns:<br />

• RIP color<br />

• Device Color<br />

The RIP color column lists the names of the colors that are expected in the<br />

job. The Device Color column lists the names of the colored proofing<br />

media.<br />

The name in the RIP color column is mapped to the name in the Device<br />

Color column, and together the color names create a color mapping.<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> automatically selects color mappings during imaging.


Configure Proof Color Mappings Dialog Box 85<br />

Buttons Available<br />

This section describes the buttons in the Configure Proof Color Mappings<br />

dialog box.<br />

Table 7: Buttons in the Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box<br />

Button<br />

Defaults<br />

New<br />

Edit<br />

Delete<br />

OK<br />

Cancel<br />

Description<br />

Click the Defaults button to reload the color mapping<br />

defaults. These defaults are pulled from the output<br />

device firmware.<br />

Click the New button to create a new color mapping.<br />

Click the Edit button to edit a selected color mapping.<br />

Click the Delete button to delete a selected color<br />

mapping from the Configure Proof Color Mappings<br />

dialog box. Click OK to confirm the deletion; click<br />

Cancel to cancel the deletion.<br />

Click the OK button to save all the changes made in the<br />

Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box and close<br />

the dialog box.<br />

Click the Cancel button to discard all changes made in<br />

the Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box and<br />

close the dialog box.


86 Chapter 4 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Reference<br />

Save PPD File Dialog Box<br />

You can access the Save PPD File dialog box by selecting Create <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

PPD File from the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu.<br />

Figure 38: Save PPD File dialog box<br />

The File Name box displays the default name of the PPD file <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong> generates. You can change this name if desired. Below is the list of<br />

PPD files in the folder shown in the Directories box.<br />

The List Files of Type box lets you filter the types of files displayed in the<br />

File Name box, by selecting a file type. The file type you select is the type of<br />

file that is displayed. All other file types are hidden from view.<br />

The Drives box lets you select the drive onto which <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> is<br />

to save the PPD file it generates.<br />

Buttons Available<br />

This section describes the buttons in the Save PPD File dialog box.<br />

Table 8: Buttons in the Save PPD File dialog box<br />

Button<br />

OK<br />

Configure<br />

Cancel<br />

Description<br />

Click the OK button to close the Save PPD File dialog<br />

box and generate a PPD file, according to the options<br />

you set.<br />

Click the Configure button to display the Configure<br />

PPD dialog box and configure the PPD file.<br />

Click the Cancel button to discard all changes made to<br />

the PPD file. The Save PPD File dialog box is closed.


Save PPD File Dialog Box 87<br />

Button<br />

Network<br />

Description<br />

Click the Network button to navigate to a network<br />

location to which you want to save the PPD file you<br />

generate.<br />

Configure PPD Dialog Box<br />

The Configure PPD dialog box displays the screening settings that are<br />

supported by Allegro RIP and recommended for the output device to<br />

which <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> is connected.<br />

When you make the PPD file available to your desktop software, you can<br />

select these screening settings in imposition software and other desktop<br />

applications, such as QuarkXPress.<br />

Note: The desktop software does not limit you to these screening settings.<br />

Click to display the Configure<br />

Screening Selections dialog box<br />

Figure 39: Configure PPD dialog box<br />

Screening Selection Section<br />

The Screening Selection section contains two types of information:<br />

• Resolution, Nominal freq<br />

• Frequency (LPI) and angle for each separation


88 Chapter 4 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Reference<br />

The Resolution, Nominal freq column displays the resolution (dpi) and<br />

nominal frequency (lpi) that the output device supports. Desktop software<br />

such as Preps use the screening information in the PPD file when creating<br />

PostScript files.<br />

PPD files let you define line frequencies, also called screen frequencies, for<br />

each color separation. However, due to a PPD file limitation, some<br />

imposition software applications that use the PPD file can only display one<br />

line frequency for all color separations. Such software cannot display a line<br />

frequency for each color separation.<br />

Figure 40 shows the correct line frequencies that will be output from Preps.<br />

Figure 40: Preps Color Separations dialog box<br />

The Frequency (LPI) and angle for each separation option is used to<br />

address this PPD file limitation. The nominal frequency defines the line<br />

frequency that will appear in imposition software such as Preps. For<br />

example, Figure 41 on page 89 shows the Preps Device <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

dialog box, where the Line box shows the nominal frequency.


Save PPD File Dialog Box 89<br />

Displays nominal<br />

frequency<br />

The nominal frequency<br />

value reminds you that<br />

one of the frequencies is<br />

set to 133.<br />

Figure 41: How nominal frequency displays in Preps<br />

If you are using a different line frequency for one of your color separations,<br />

you should make the nominal frequency a number that reflects the<br />

different line frequency. For example, as shown in Figure 41, the nominal<br />

line frequency is 153. In this case, it is meant to remind you that this<br />

screening selection has line frequencies of 150 for all separations except<br />

one, which is set to 133.<br />

The Frequency (LPI) and angle for each separation column displays the<br />

lines per inch (lpi) and angles recommended for Creo-supported RIP<br />

software. Desktop software such as Preps use the frequency and angle<br />

information in the PPD file when creating PostScript files.


90 Chapter 4 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Reference<br />

Custom screening angles include all screening angle sets that are different<br />

from the predefined sets in the Configure Screening Settings dialog box<br />

(see Figure 42 on page 91).<br />

If you set up custom screening angles in the Configure Screening Settings<br />

dialog box you must set up your RIP software accordingly. See Editing<br />

Screening Settings in Chapter for more information.<br />

If you want to use multiple angle sets, please contact a service<br />

representative.<br />

Table 9 on page 90 describes the buttons in the Screening Selection section<br />

of the Configure PPD dialog box.<br />

Table 9: Buttons in the Screening section<br />

Buttons in the<br />

Screening<br />

section<br />

Edit<br />

New<br />

Delete<br />

Description<br />

Select a screening setting, then click the Edit button to<br />

display the Configure Screening Settings dialog box<br />

and edit the screening setting. See Configure Screening<br />

Settings Dialog Box on page 91.<br />

Click the New button to display the Configure<br />

Screening Settings dialog box and define a new set of<br />

screening parameters.<br />

Click the Delete button to delete a selected screening<br />

setting from the Screening tab. Click Generate to<br />

confirm the deletion; click Cancel to cancel the<br />

deletion.


Save PPD File Dialog Box 91<br />

Configure Screening Settings Dialog Box<br />

The Configure Screening Settings dialog box is displayed by clicking the<br />

New or Edit buttons on the Screening tab of the Generate PPD dialog box.<br />

Figure 42: Configure Screening Settings dialog box<br />

Note: The custom color line frequency and screening angle values are used for<br />

all spot colors.<br />

The Configure Screening Settings dialog box contains five options:<br />

• Resolution (DPI)<br />

• Nominal Frequency (LPI)<br />

• Predefined Angle Sets<br />

• Frequency (LPI)<br />

• Angle<br />

Use the Resolution (DPI) option to select the resolution (dpi) for which the<br />

screening set will be applied.<br />

Use the Nominal Frequency (LPI) option to type the frequency value that<br />

will appear in the imposition software when the PPD file is used.<br />

Use the Predefined Angle Sets option to select an angle that matches the<br />

Harlequin Precision Screening (HPS) options set in Allegro RIP. If you set<br />

this option, don’t set the Angle option.<br />

Use the Frequency (LPI) option to type or select the line frequency for each<br />

separation color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and Custom Color). You<br />

may use decimal values for line frequencies.


92 Chapter 4 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Reference<br />

Use the Angle option to type the angle for each separation color (Cyan,<br />

Magenta, Yellow, Black, and Custom Color). If you set this option, don’t<br />

set the Predefined Angle Sets option.<br />

Basic Options<br />

The Basic Options section contains two options (see Figure 39 on page 87):<br />

• Default Resolution (DPI)<br />

• Include Standard PPD media types<br />

From the Default resolution (DPI) drop-down list, select the default<br />

resolution for the output device. This information is used to build a profile<br />

of the output device for desktop software such as Preps that use PPD file<br />

information when they create files.<br />

Select the Include standard PPD media types check box to include standard<br />

PPD media types in the PPD file. Some examples of standard media types<br />

are: letter, legal, tabloid, and A4. These standard media types are used by<br />

desktop publishing applications, such as QuarkXPress, when writing<br />

PostScript files.<br />

Spot Function Selection Section<br />

Spot functions are dot shapes that can influence the quality of print<br />

reproduction. To compliment the type of images you are printing, choose<br />

the spot function carefully.<br />

By default, the PPD file includes four spot functions; however, you can add<br />

additional spot functions to the PPD file when you configure it.<br />

When you add a custom spot function, you must do two things:<br />

• Add the custom spot function to the PPD file, so you can use it in<br />

desktop applications.<br />

• Register the custom spot function with your RIP software, so you can<br />

select it in the RIP screening controls and create calibration curves for<br />

it.<br />

For more information on spot functions, see the Allegro RIP Reference <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

The Include in PPD file box lists the spot functions that will be included in<br />

the PPD file.


Save PPD File Dialog Box 93<br />

The Do not include in PPD file box lists the spot functions that will be<br />

omitted from the PPD file.<br />

Table 10 on page 93 describes the buttons in the Spot Function Selection<br />

section of the Configure PPD dialog box.<br />

Table 10: Buttons in the Spot Function Selection section<br />

Buttons in the<br />

Spot Function<br />

Selection section<br />

Include<br />

Remove<br />

View<br />

New<br />

Delete<br />

Description<br />

Select a spot function in the Do not include in PPD<br />

file box, then click the Include button to move the<br />

selected spot function to the Include in PPD file<br />

box.<br />

Select a spot function in the Include in PPD file box,<br />

then click the Remove button to move the selected<br />

spot function to the Do not include in PPD file box.<br />

Click the View button to display the Spot Function<br />

dialog box and look at the code for the selected spot<br />

function.<br />

Click the New button to display the Spot Function<br />

dialog box and add a custom spot function to the<br />

PPD file.<br />

Click the Delete button to delete selected spot<br />

functions from the PPD file. Click the Generate<br />

button to confirm the deletion; click the Cancel<br />

button to cancel the deletion.<br />

Note: You can’t delete a default spot function.


94 Chapter 4 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Reference<br />

Buttons Available<br />

This section describes the buttons in the Configure PPD dialog box.<br />

Button<br />

OK<br />

Load<br />

Defaults<br />

Cancel<br />

Description<br />

Click the OK button to close the Configure PPD dialog<br />

box.<br />

Click the Load Defaults button to load all the default<br />

screening settings.<br />

Click the Cancel button to discard all changes you’ve<br />

made in the Generate PPD dialog box and close the<br />

dialog box.<br />

Spool Folder <strong>Configuration</strong> Dialog Box<br />

You can access the Spool Folder <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box by selecting<br />

Workstation <strong>Configuration</strong> from the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu.<br />

Figure 43: Spool Folder <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box<br />

This dialog box contains the following options:


Spool Folder <strong>Configuration</strong> Dialog Box 95<br />

Spool Folder<br />

The current spool folder name and location displays in the box beside this<br />

button. This is where Allegro RIP detects the arrival of files and considers<br />

them as possible jobs, by looking at the type of file and any file names<br />

excluded in the Filenames prefix list.<br />

Click the Spool Folder button to change the folder name or location.<br />

Alternatively, you can type the path name in the box beside the button, but<br />

be aware that accidental typing errors can cause an error or the creation of<br />

a new folder.<br />

Create Spool Folders if They Do Not Exist<br />

Select this check box if you want Allegro RIP to create the named spool<br />

folders if they do not already exist.<br />

Allegro RIP creates the folders when the input channel becomes available<br />

for use. The time can be immediately after you click OK in the Input<br />

Channel Edit dialog box for an enabled channel, but you may need to select<br />

Start Inputs on the Allegro RIP menu or enable the input channel before it<br />

becomes fully available.<br />

Warn If Spool Folders Do Not Exist<br />

Select this check box if you want Allegro RIP to issue a warning if the spool,<br />

error, or complete folder specified doesn’t exist.<br />

Error Folder<br />

The current error folder name and location displays in the box beside this<br />

button. If a file fails to print, Allegro RIP moves it to the folder specified<br />

unless the Delete on error check box is selected.<br />

If a file prints successfully, Allegro RIP moves it to the complete folder<br />

specified unless the Delete on completion check box is selected.<br />

Click the Error Folder button to change the complete folder name or<br />

location.<br />

Delete on Error<br />

Select this check box if you want Allegro RIP to delete files that the spool<br />

folder fails to print. Leave this box clear if you want failed files to be moved<br />

to the error folder. Note that a file is treated as an error if you abort it while<br />

it is being processed.


96 Chapter 4 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Reference<br />

Complete Folder<br />

The current complete folder name and location display in the box beside<br />

this button. If a file successfully prints, Allegro RIP moves it to the folder<br />

specified unless the Delete on completion check box is selected.<br />

Click the Complete Folder button to change the complete folder name or<br />

location.<br />

Delete on Completion<br />

Select this check box if you want Allegro RIP to delete files that the spool<br />

folder succeeds in printing. Otherwise Allegro RIP moves these files to the<br />

complete folder.<br />

Filenames Prefix List<br />

This text field specifies files to ignore when they arrive in the spool folder,<br />

if you have also selected the Exclude prefix list box. The specification is<br />

based on the first part (prefix) of the file names.<br />

Prefixes are case sensitive.<br />

For example, if you type in the prefix ab, Allegro RIP ignores all the<br />

arriving files whose names begin with ab. Examples of files that Allegro<br />

RIP would ignore for this prefix are abacus.pdf, abandon.ps, and ab123.<br />

(Allegro RIP would not ignore ABALONE.PS, 123ab.pdf, or _absence.)<br />

Ignoring means that Allegro RIP does not process the files and allows the<br />

files to remain in the spool folder until removed by a user or other<br />

software.<br />

If you remove or disable a prefix while the spool folder is still active,<br />

Allegro RIP processes any files previously excluded by that prefix but still<br />

present in the spool folder.<br />

You can enter several prefixes. Separate multiple prefixes by commas<br />

without surrounding spaces. (If you add spaces after a comma, Allegro RIP<br />

treats the spaces as part of the following string.) Each prefix can include<br />

alphanumeric characters, the underscore character, the period character,<br />

and spaces.<br />

For example, this is a valid list of three prefixes: aaab_c,BAC,4.4<br />

Exclude Prefix List<br />

Select this check box to make the prefix list active. Leave this box empty to<br />

disable the prefix list without deleting the list of prefixes.


Spool Folder <strong>Configuration</strong> Dialog Box 97<br />

Scan Folder Rate<br />

The value in the Scan spool folder every seconds box specifies how<br />

often the Allegro RIP checks the spool folder for new files to be printed.<br />

File Stabilization Rate<br />

The value in the Time to wait for file to stabilize box specifies the number<br />

of seconds that the spool folder waits for the size of an arriving file to<br />

remain the same before assuming that it has been fully written and is<br />

therefore ready to be printed.


98 Chapter 4 – <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Reference


5<br />

System<br />

<strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Overview ........................................................................................100<br />

Selecting an Output Device .............................................................101<br />

Configuring the Allegro Workstation...............................................102<br />

Configuring Media Types ................................................................105<br />

Configuring Plate Types...................................................................107<br />

Configuring Proof Types..................................................................112<br />

Configuring Proof Color Mappings..................................................117<br />

Configuring Allegro RIP...................................................................122<br />

Configuring Fonts ...........................................................................127<br />

Configuring PPD and PPX Files ........................................................130<br />

Configuring Page Features ..............................................................149


100 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Overview<br />

Configuring <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> includes:<br />

• system configuration<br />

• job-specific configuration<br />

This chapter describes how to configure your <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> system.<br />

For information on job-specific configuration, see Chapter 6, Job<br />

<strong>Configuration</strong>.<br />

System configuration includes:<br />

• selecting an output device<br />

• configuring the workstation<br />

• defining media types<br />

• defining plate and/or proof types<br />

• creating color mappings<br />

• configuring Allegro RIP<br />

• configuring fonts<br />

• configuring and generating PPD and PPX files<br />

• making the PPD and PPX files available to your imposition and<br />

desktop software<br />

• configuring page features<br />

Once you have finished configuring your <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> system,<br />

you’re ready to configure <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> for specific job types. See<br />

Chapter 6, Job <strong>Configuration</strong>.


Selecting an Output Device 101<br />

Selecting an Output Device<br />

To select an output device:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Select Device.<br />

The Select Output Device dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 44: Select Output Device dialog box<br />

2. Select an output device from the list.<br />

3. Click Select.<br />

The Select Output Device dialog box closes, and <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

connects to the output device you selected.<br />

The output device selected displays to the right of the toolbar as shown<br />

in Figure 45.<br />

Figure 45: Output device information in toolbar


102 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Configuring the Allegro Workstation<br />

This section describes how to configure your Allegro workstation.\<br />

Attention: You must exit <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> according to the instructions on<br />

page 11 to save your configuration settings.<br />

Selecting the Unit of Measurement<br />

To select the unit of measurement:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Workstation <strong>Configuration</strong>.<br />

The <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 46: <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box<br />

2. Under Units, select the unit of measurement that you require.<br />

3. Click OK.<br />

The <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box closes.<br />

4. Restart <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> to apply the change.


Configuring the Allegro Workstation 103<br />

Adding Medium Index Numbers to PPD Files<br />

You define or select the medium index number when you configure the<br />

plate type.<br />

To add a medium index number to a PPD file:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Workstation <strong>Configuration</strong>.<br />

The <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box displays.<br />

2. Select the Add Medium Index to PPD check box.<br />

By default, the Add Medium Index to PPD check box is cleared. When<br />

you select this check box, <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> embeds the medium<br />

index number set in the plate or proof type in the device-specific PPD<br />

file. Any file imposed with this option turned on will have the medium<br />

index embedded in it.<br />

*PageSize 32x44: " > setpagedevice<br />

(CREOPARAMETER PLATENAME 32x44) pop "<br />

3. Click OK.<br />

The <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box closes.<br />

4. Restart <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> to apply the change.<br />

Configuring Manual Proof/Plate Selection<br />

To configure manual proof or plate selection:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Workstation <strong>Configuration</strong>.<br />

The <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box displays.<br />

2. Select the Manual Plate/Proof Selection check box, and click OK.<br />

The <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box closes.<br />

3. Restart <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> to apply the change.


104 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Configuring Manual Proof Eject<br />

You can configure manual proof eject only when using a separated<br />

workflow in RIP-to-disk mode.<br />

To configure manual proof eject:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Workstation <strong>Configuration</strong>.<br />

The <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box displays.<br />

2. Select the Manual Proof Eject check box, and click OK.<br />

The <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box closes.<br />

3. Restart <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> to apply the change.<br />

An Eject Proof command displays under the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu.<br />

Licensing PrintLink (Optional)<br />

PrintLink is automatically installed with <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>. However, it<br />

cannot be used until it is activated. To obtain your PrintLink license key<br />

number, report your Allegro serial number from the <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog<br />

box to a qualified service representative, who will give you your PrintLink<br />

license key number.<br />

To activate PrintLink:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Workstation <strong>Configuration</strong>.<br />

The <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box displays.<br />

2. In the PrintLink Software License Key box, type your PrintLink<br />

license key number.<br />

3. Click OK.<br />

The <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box closes.<br />

4. Restart <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> to apply the change.


Configuring Media Types 105<br />

Licensing Staccato (Optional)<br />

Staccato is automatically installed with <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>. However, it<br />

cannot be used until it is activated. To obtain a Staccato license key<br />

number, report your Allegro serial number from the <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog<br />

box to a qualified service representative, who will give you your Staccato<br />

license key number.<br />

To activate Staccato:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Workstation <strong>Configuration</strong>.<br />

The <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box displays.<br />

2. In the Staccato Software License Key box, type your Staccato license<br />

key number.<br />

3. Click OK.<br />

The <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box closes.<br />

4. Restart <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> to apply the change.<br />

Configuring Media Types<br />

Media types are set up by service personnel during <strong>Trendsetter</strong> system<br />

installation. If you want to add additional media types to your system,<br />

contact a service representative.<br />

To specify a medium index number for a media type:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Media <strong>Configuration</strong>.<br />

The Media <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 47: Media <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box<br />

The Laser Exposure value is display only. This value is configured by<br />

service personnel.


106 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

2. Under Available Media, select the media type that you want to<br />

configure. The media is configured in the device by service personnel.<br />

3. In the Medium Index box, type the medium index number that<br />

corresponds with the chosen media type.<br />

See the Allegro RIP Reference <strong>Guide</strong> for a list of the default number by<br />

media type.<br />

4. Click OK.<br />

Two warning messages display.<br />

Figure 48: Confirmation message when changing medium index<br />

Figure 49: Caution to make change to page setup as well<br />

5. Click OK.<br />

The Media <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box closes, and the media type<br />

changes you made are saved in the database.


Configuring Plate Types 107<br />

Configuring Plate Types<br />

Adding Plate Types<br />

Note: When you add, delete, or modify a plate type, you must generate a new<br />

PPD file in order to make the imposition workstation aware of the changes to the<br />

plate type. See Generating Device-specific PPD Files on page 131.<br />

To add a plate type:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Plate Definition.<br />

The Plate Definition dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 50: Plate Definition dialog box<br />

2. Click the New button.<br />

The Plate Type Specifications dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 51: Plate Type Specifications dialog box


108 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

3. In the Plate Name box, type a name for the plate type you are adding.<br />

Note: The following characters cannot be used in a plate type name:<br />

spaces, colons [:], forward slashes [/], back slashes [\], parentheses [()], or<br />

quotation marks ["].<br />

4. From the Media Type box, select the media type for the plate type you<br />

are adding.<br />

5. Set the remaining options as required.<br />

For definitions of these options, see Plate Type Specifications Dialog<br />

Box on page 77.<br />

6. Click OK.<br />

The Plate Type Specifications dialog box closes.<br />

7. Click the Done button.<br />

The Plate Definition dialog box closes, and the plate type is added to<br />

the plate type database.<br />

8. Generate a PPD file, then copy that PPD file to your imposition<br />

workstation.<br />

For details, see Generating Device-specific PPD Files on page 131.<br />

Modifying Plate Type Information<br />

To modify a plate type:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Plate Definition.<br />

The Plate Definition dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 52: Plate Definition dialog box


Configuring Plate Types 109<br />

2. Under Available Plates, select the plate or film you want to edit.<br />

3. Click the Edit button.<br />

The Plate Type Specifications dialog box displays, showing the media’s<br />

current configuration.<br />

4. Modify the plate type information.<br />

5. Click OK.<br />

The Plate Type Specifications dialog box closes.<br />

6. Click the Done button.<br />

The Plate Definition dialog box closes, and the plate type changes you<br />

made are added to the plate type database.<br />

7. Generate a PPD file, then copy that PPD file to your imposition<br />

workstation.<br />

For details, see Generating Device-specific PPD Files on page 131.<br />

Adding Custom Medium Index to Plate Types<br />

To add a custom medium index number to a plate type:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Plate Definition.<br />

The Plate Definition dialog box displays.<br />

2. Do one of the following:<br />

a. To edit a plate or film type, under Available Plates, select the plate<br />

or film that you want to edit.<br />

b. Click the Edit button.<br />

The Plate Type Specifications dialog box displays the media’s<br />

current configuration.


110 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Figure 53: Plate Type Specifications dialog box<br />

Or:<br />

a. To create a new plate or film type, click the New button.<br />

The Plate Type Specifications dialog box displays<br />

b. If creating a new plate type, in the Plate Name box, type a name for<br />

the plate type you are adding.<br />

Note: The following characters cannot be used in a plate type name:<br />

spaces, colons [:], forward slashes [/], back slashes [\], parentheses [()], or<br />

quotation marks ["].<br />

3. Ensure that the Use Media’s box to the right of the Medium Index box<br />

is cleared.<br />

4. Type the custom medium index number in the Medium Index box.<br />

5. Click OK.<br />

The following warning message appears:<br />

Figure 54: Warning to configure calibration curves with the same custom<br />

medium index number<br />

6. Click OK to continue<br />

The Plate Definitions dialog box displays.<br />

7. Click Done to save the changes.<br />

The Plate Definitions dialog box closes.


Configuring Plate Types 111<br />

8. If you created a new plate type or if you edited a plate type that<br />

specifies that the medium index be included in the PPD file, generate<br />

the PPD file, then copy that PPD file to your imposition workstation.<br />

For details, see Generating Device-specific PPD Files on page 131.<br />

Deleting Plate Types<br />

To delete a plate type:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Plate Definition.<br />

The Plate Definition dialog box displays.<br />

2. Under Available Plates, select the plate type that you want to delete.<br />

3. Click the Delete button.<br />

The Delete Confirmation dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 55: Delete Confirmation dialog box<br />

4. Click the Yes button to confirm that you want to delete the plate type.<br />

5. Click the Done button.<br />

The Plate Definition dialog box closes, and the plate type is deleted<br />

from the plate type database.<br />

6. Generate a PPD file, then copy that PPD file to your imposition<br />

workstation.<br />

For details, see Generating Device-specific PPD Files on page 131.


112 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Configuring Proof Types<br />

Whenever you add, delete, or modify a proof type, you must generate a<br />

new PPD file in order to make the imposition workstation aware of the<br />

changes. See Generating Device-specific PPD Files on page 131.<br />

Adding Proof Types<br />

To add a proof type:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Proof Definition.<br />

The Proof Definition dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 56: Proof Definition dialog box<br />

2. Click the New button.<br />

The Proof Type Specifications dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 57: Proof Type Specifications dialog box


Configuring Proof Types 113<br />

3. In the Proof Name box, type a name for the plate type you are adding.<br />

Note: The following characters cannot be used in a proof type name:<br />

spaces, colons [:], forward slashes [/], back slashes [\], parentheses [()], or<br />

quotation marks ["].<br />

4. In the Media Type box, select the media type for the proof type you<br />

are adding.<br />

5. In the Proof Size box, select one of the standard sizes.<br />

Or:<br />

a. Select Other to define a non-standard size.<br />

b. In the Around Drum box, type a value in inches.<br />

c. In the Along Drum box, type a value in inches.<br />

6. Set the remaining options as required.<br />

7. Click OK.<br />

a. If you used the proof size Other, a confirmation message displays<br />

telling you the preconfigured proof size that will be used.<br />

Figure 58: Confirmation of proof size that will be used<br />

b. Click OK to continue.<br />

The Proof Type Specifications dialog box closes.<br />

8. Click the Done button.<br />

The Proof Definition dialog box closes, and the proof type is added to<br />

the proof type database.<br />

9. Generate a PPD file, then copy that PPD file to your imposition<br />

workstation.<br />

For details, see Generating Device-specific PPD Files on page 131.


114 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Modifying Proof Type Information<br />

To modify a proof type:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Proof Definition.<br />

The Proof Definition dialog box displays.<br />

2. Under Available Proofs, select the proof that you want to edit.<br />

3. Click the Edit button.<br />

The Proof Type Specifications dialog box displays, showing the media’s<br />

current configuration.<br />

4. Modify the proof type information.<br />

5. Click OK.<br />

The Proof Type Specifications dialog box closes.<br />

6. Click the Done button.<br />

The Proof Definition dialog box closes, and the proof type changes you<br />

made are added to the proof type database.<br />

7. Generate a PPD file, then copy that PPD file to your imposition<br />

workstation.<br />

For details, see Generating Device-specific PPD Files on page 131.<br />

Adding Custom Medium Index to Proof Types<br />

To add a custom medium index number to a proof type:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Proof Definition.<br />

The Proof Definition dialog box displays.<br />

2. Do one of the following:<br />

a. To edit a proof type, under Available Proof, select the proof you<br />

want to edit.<br />

b. Click the Edit button.<br />

The Proof Type Specifications dialog box displays the media’s<br />

current configuration.<br />

Or:<br />

a. Click the New button.


Configuring Proof Types 115<br />

The Proof Type Specifications dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 59: New Proof Type Specifications dialog box<br />

b. In the Proof Name box, type a name for the proof type you are<br />

adding.<br />

Note: The following characters cannot be used in a proof type name:<br />

spaces, colons [:], forward slashes [/], back slashes [\], parentheses [()], or<br />

quotation marks ["].<br />

3. Ensure that the Use Media’s box to the right of the Medium Index box<br />

is cleared.<br />

4. Type the custom medium index number in the Medium Index box.<br />

5. Click OK.<br />

The following warning message appears:<br />

Figure 60: Warning to configure calibration curves with the same custom<br />

medium index number<br />

6. Click OK to continue.<br />

The Proof Definitions dialog box displays.<br />

7. Click Done to save the changes.<br />

The Proof Definitions dialog box closes.<br />

8. If you created a new proof type or if you edited a proof type that<br />

specifies that the medium index be included in the PPD file, generate<br />

the PPD file, then copy that PPD file to your imposition workstation.<br />

For details, see Generating Device-specific PPD Files on page 131.


116 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Deleting Proof Types<br />

To delete a proof type:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Proof Definition.<br />

The Proof Definition dialog box displays.<br />

2. Under Available Proofs, select the proof type that you want to delete.<br />

3. Click the Delete button.<br />

The Delete Confirmation dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 61: Delete Confirmation dialog box<br />

4. Click the Yes button to confirm that you want to delete the proof type.<br />

5. Click the Done button.<br />

The Proof Definition dialog box closes, and the proof type is deleted<br />

from the proof type database.<br />

6. Generate a PPD file, then copy that PPD file to your imposition<br />

workstation.<br />

For details, see Generating Device-specific PPD Files on page 131.


Configuring Proof Color Mappings 117<br />

Configuring Proof Color Mappings<br />

Proof color mappings are mandatory for digital halftone proofing, but they<br />

are not used for platemaking, film-making, or any other process.<br />

Note: The color names in the RIP Color column in the Configure Proof Color<br />

Mappings dialog box must exactly match the color names Allegro RIP interprets<br />

in the PostScript file, including upper and lower case and spacing.<br />

See also Proof Color Mapping Table Spectrum Devices on page 48.<br />

This section describes four procedures:<br />

• loading default color mappings<br />

• adding a new color mapping<br />

• editing a color mapping<br />

• deleting a color mapping<br />

Loading or Reloading Default Color Mappings<br />

To load or reload default color mappings:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong>Proofsetter<strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Proof Color<br />

Mapping.<br />

The Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 62: Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box


118 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

2. Under Device Medium, select the media for which you want to load<br />

default color mappings.<br />

3. Click the Defaults button.<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> displays the default color mappings in the<br />

Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box—that is, the proof donor<br />

colors configured in the output device.<br />

4. Click OK.<br />

The Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box closes, and the<br />

default color mappings are loaded.<br />

Adding a New Color Mapping<br />

To add a new color mapping:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong>Proofsetter<strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Proof Color<br />

Mapping.<br />

The Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 63: Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box<br />

2. Click the New button.<br />

The Spot Color Table Entry dialog box displays.


Configuring Proof Color Mappings 119<br />

Figure 64: Spot Color Table Entry dialog box<br />

3. In the Enter output Rip color box, type the name of the spot color you<br />

want to process.<br />

Note: The name must be exactly the same as the name in the PostScript file,<br />

including upper and lower case spelling and spaces. Also, each RIP color<br />

name must be unique. You can run the ListSpotColors.ps page feature to<br />

list all the spot colors in the file in the Allegro RIP window.<br />

4. From the Select Device color box, select the proof color donor to<br />

which you want to map the RIP color.<br />

5. Click OK.<br />

The Spot Color Table Entry dialog box closes and the Configure Proof<br />

Color Mappings dialog box displays with the new color mapping.<br />

Figure 65: Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box<br />

6. Click OK.<br />

The Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box closes, and the new<br />

color map is saved.


120 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Editing a Color Mapping<br />

To edit a color mapping:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong>Proofsetter<strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Proof Color<br />

Mapping.<br />

The Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 66: Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box<br />

2. Select the color map that you want to edit.<br />

3. Click the Edit button.<br />

The Spot Color Table Entry dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 67: Spot Color Table Entry dialog box<br />

4. Edit the options as desired.<br />

5. Click OK.<br />

The Spot Color Table Entry dialog box closes.


Configuring Proof Color Mappings 121<br />

6. Click OK.<br />

The Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box closes, and the color<br />

mapping you modified is saved.<br />

Deleting a Color Mapping<br />

To delete a color mapping:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong>Proofsetter<strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Proof Color<br />

Mapping.<br />

The Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 68: Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box<br />

2. Select the color map that you want to delete.<br />

3. Click the Delete button.<br />

Important: The color mapping will be deleted immediately. There is no<br />

confirmation or warning message.<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> deletes the selected color mapping from the<br />

Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box.<br />

4. Click OK.<br />

The Configure Proof Color Mappings dialog box closes, and the color<br />

mapping deletion is confirmed.


122 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Configuring Allegro RIP<br />

Configuring a Data Storage Threshold<br />

This section contains Allegro RIP procedures for:<br />

• configuring a data storage threshold<br />

• changing the storage location for RIP-to-disk<br />

• configuring the RIP mode<br />

The data storage threshold is the hard disk storage space limit on the<br />

Allegro workstation. The RIP checks if there is sufficient hard disk space<br />

available for processing, regardless of whether it is configured for RIP-todisk<br />

or RIP-to-plate mode.<br />

In RIP-to-plate mode, the RIP may have to page out the display list if not<br />

enough RAM is available and the RIP checks to make sure that available<br />

space is not below the minimum.<br />

In RIP-to-disk mode, the RIP saves page buffers on the hard disk.<br />

In either mode, an error occurs when you do not have enough disk space.<br />

A warning message appears in the Allegro window. The RIP stops<br />

processing files if available disk space drops below the minimum allowed.<br />

You must delete files from the Completed directory and/or delete page<br />

buffers to free up disk space before the RIP will continue processing files.<br />

The amount of hard disk space available displays at the bottom of the<br />

Output Controller/Monitor window. This window is available only if<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> is in RIP-to-disk mode.<br />

To configure a data storage threshold:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected. When<br />

selected, the Start Inputs command has a check mark beside it. Click<br />

the Start Inputs option to select or deselect it.<br />

2. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Configure RIP.<br />

The Configure RIP dialog box displays.


Configuring Allegro RIP 123<br />

Figure 69: Configure RIP dialog box<br />

3. Click the Options button.<br />

The Configure RIP Options dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 70: Configure RIP Options dialog box<br />

4. In the Disk space left for system box, type a number that defines the<br />

data storage threshold.<br />

A warning will be displayed when the free hard disk space falls below<br />

this number. The recommended value is 20 MB.<br />

5. Click OK.<br />

The Configure RIP Options dialog box closes. Allegro RIP processes<br />

jobs, in either RIP mode, until the available disk space goes below the<br />

minimum disk space allowed for the system.<br />

6. Click OK.


124 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Attention: Allegro RIP stops processing jobs if the available disk space<br />

drops below the minimum setting. If this happens, you must get more disk<br />

space (by deleting files and/or page buffers) before the RIP will start<br />

processing again.<br />

7. You must reselect Start Inputs, which you deselected in step 1.<br />

8. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Start Inputs.<br />

A check mark displayed beside Start Inputs indicates the option is<br />

selected. When selected, Start Inputs allows <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> to<br />

monitor and process defined input methods.<br />

Changing the Storage Location for RIP-to-Disk<br />

To change where RIP-to-disk files are stored:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, Start Inputs has a check mark beside it. Click the Start<br />

Inputs option to select or deselect it.<br />

2. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Configure RIP.<br />

The Configure RIP dialog box displays.<br />

3. Click the Page buffer folder Change button.<br />

The Select Folder dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 71: Select Folder dialog box<br />

4. Select a new location where you want to store your RIP-to-disk image<br />

files.<br />

The location can be any folder that Windows NT can access.


Configuring Allegro RIP 125<br />

Attention: A default page buffer folder location was defined on the<br />

Allegro workstation when your <strong>Trendsetter</strong> was installed. Assigning the<br />

page buffer location to a folder on your network will result in a major<br />

deterioration of your system performance. CreoScitex does not recommend<br />

that you assign the page buffer location to a folder on your network.<br />

5. Click OK.<br />

The Select Folder dialog box closes.<br />

6. Click OK.<br />

The Configure RIP dialog box closes. Your RIP-to-disk page buffers<br />

will now be stored in the folder you selected.<br />

7. You must reselect Start Inputs, which you deselected in step 1.<br />

8. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Start Inputs.<br />

A check mark displayed beside Start Inputs indicates the option is<br />

selected. When selected, Start Inputs allows <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> to<br />

monitor and process defined input methods.<br />

Configuring the RIP Mode<br />

You can configure <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> for RIP-to-plate mode or for RIPto-disk<br />

mode. For details on each mode, see RIP-to-Disk and RIP-to-Plate<br />

Modes on page 52.<br />

To change the RIP mode:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, Start Inputs has a check mark beside it. Click the Start<br />

Inputs option to select or deselect it.<br />

2. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Configure RIP.<br />

The Configure RIP dialog box displays.


126 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Figure 72: Configure RIP dialog box<br />

3. Select the mode you want in the Page buffering box:<br />

• To use RIP-to-plate mode, select Single (If required).<br />

• To use RIP-to-disk mode, select Multiple (Parallel).<br />

4. Click OK.<br />

The Configure RIP dialog box closes, and the RIP mode you selected is<br />

enabled.<br />

5. You must reselect Start Inputs, which you deselected in step 1.<br />

6. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Start Inputs.<br />

A check mark displayed beside Start Inputs indicates the option is<br />

selected. When selected, Start Inputs allows <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> to<br />

monitor and process defined input methods.


Configuring Fonts 127<br />

Configuring Fonts<br />

You can install, list, and delete fonts in Allegro RIP.<br />

Naming syntax for fonts is extremely important. For example, if ACaslon-<br />

AltBld is installed but ACaslon-AltBold is called for in the PostScript file<br />

(that is, Bld versus Bold), Allegro RIP will abort the job or substitute<br />

Courier as the font, depending on how the page setup is defined. See<br />

Managing Page Setups on page 203.<br />

Installing a Font<br />

If you are updating a font, you should delete the existing font before<br />

installing the updated font. See Deleting a Font on page 129.<br />

To install a font:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, Start Inputs has a check mark beside it. Click the Start<br />

Inputs option to select or deselect it.<br />

2. From the Fonts menu, select Install Fonts.<br />

The Install Fonts dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 73: Install Fonts dialog box<br />

By default, Allegro RIP displays the following file types: pfb and pfa.<br />

To view other file types, select the Show all files check box.<br />

3. Go to the folder that the fonts are in.<br />

4. Select the font or fonts (while holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key)<br />

that you want to install.


128 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

5. Click the Install button.<br />

You can look in the Allegro window for confirmation that the font<br />

install was successful. If the font was successfully installed, this window<br />

will display the following message:<br />

Converted font to DLD1 format<br />

6. You must reselect Start Inputs, which you deselected in step 1.<br />

7. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Start Inputs.<br />

A check mark displayed beside Start Inputs indicates the option is<br />

selected. When selected, Start Inputs allows <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> to<br />

monitor and process defined input methods.<br />

Listing Installed Fonts<br />

To list installed fonts:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, Start Inputs has a check mark beside it. Click the Start<br />

Inputs option to select or deselect it.<br />

2. From the Fonts menu, select List Fonts.<br />

The Allegro window displays, listing all the installed fonts.<br />

Figure 74: Allegro window


Configuring Fonts 129<br />

3. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Start Inputs to reselect Start Inputs,<br />

which you deselected in step 1.<br />

A check mark displayed beside Start Inputs indicates the option is<br />

selected. When selected, Start Inputs allows <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> to<br />

monitor and process defined input methods.<br />

Deleting a Font<br />

To delete a font:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, Start Inputs has a check mark beside it. Click the Start<br />

Inputs option to select or deselect it.<br />

2. From the Fonts menu, select Delete Fonts.<br />

The Delete Highlighted Fonts dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 75: Delete Highlighted Fonts dialog box<br />

3. Select the font you want to delete.<br />

4. Click the Delete button.<br />

The Delete Highlighted Fonts dialog box closes, and the font is deleted<br />

from Allegro RIP.<br />

5. The Allegro window lists the fonts deleted.<br />

Deleted font file "fonts/Bembo"<br />

Deleted font file "fonts/Bembo-AltBold"<br />

Deleted font file "fonts/Bembo-AltBoldItalic"<br />

6. You must reselect Start Inputs, which you deselected in step 1.


130 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

7. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Start Inputs.<br />

A check mark displayed beside Start Inputs indicates the option is<br />

selected. When selected, Start Inputs allows <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> to<br />

monitor and process defined input methods.<br />

Configuring PPD and PPX Files<br />

This section contains procedures for:<br />

• generating device-specific PPD files<br />

• loading the default PPD file settings<br />

• creating new screening settings<br />

• editing screening settings<br />

• deleting screening settings<br />

• setting up custom screen angles<br />

• using page features<br />

• including spot functions<br />

• removing spot functions<br />

• viewing spot function code<br />

• adding custom spot functions<br />

• adding a custom spot function to Allegro RIP<br />

• deleting custom spot functions<br />

• copying PPD and PPX files to your desktop<br />

• determining which output device the PPD file is for<br />

• setting default Allegro RIP settings in desktop publishing applications


Configuring PPD and PPX Files 131<br />

Generating Device-specific PPD Files<br />

To generate the device-specific PPD file:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Create <strong>Trendsetter</strong> PPD File.<br />

The Save PPD File dialog box displays, containing the standard<br />

Windows NT drive, folder, and file specification options and the<br />

default PPD file name.<br />

Figure 76: Save PPD File dialog box<br />

Note: The PPX file names are not displayed in this dialog box. However, a<br />

PPX file is created automatically when you generate a PPD file.<br />

2. If you want to give this PPD file a unique file name, type the name in<br />

the File Name box. Otherwise, skip this step.<br />

3. Click OK.<br />

The Save PPD File dialog box closes, and the PPD and PPX files are<br />

generated.<br />

Loading the Default PPD File Settings<br />

To load the default PPD file settings:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Create <strong>Trendsetter</strong> PPD File.<br />

The Save PPD File dialog box displays.<br />

2. Click the Configure button.<br />

The Configure PPD dialog box displays.


132 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Figure 77: Configure PPD dialog box<br />

Note: If you have Creo’s Staccato software installed, the Include in PPD<br />

file list will contain additional spot functions. Refer to the Staccato User<br />

<strong>Guide</strong> for details.<br />

3. Click the Load Defaults button.<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> loads the default PPD file settings.<br />

4. Click OK.<br />

The Configure PPD dialog box closes, and the Save PPD File dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

5. Click OK.<br />

The Save PPD File dialog box closes. The PPD and PPX files are<br />

generated.<br />

Creating New Screening Settings<br />

To configure and generate the device-specific PPD file:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Create <strong>Trendsetter</strong> PPD File.<br />

The Save PPD File dialog box displays.<br />

2. Click the Configure button.<br />

The Configure PPD dialog box displays.


Configuring PPD and PPX Files 133<br />

Figure 78: Configure PPD dialog box<br />

Note: If you have Staccato software installed, the Include in PPD file list<br />

will contain additional spot functions. Refer to the Staccato User <strong>Guide</strong> for<br />

details.<br />

3. Under Screening Selection, click the New button.<br />

The Configure Screening Settings dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 79: Configure Screening Settings dialog box<br />

4. Define the screening settings you want, and click OK.<br />

If the screening you defined already exists, a confirmation dialog box<br />

displays.<br />

5. Click Yes to continue. The confirmation dialog box closes.<br />

The Configure PPD dialog box displays.


134 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

6. Click OK.<br />

The Configure PPD dialog box closes, and the Save PPD File dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

7. Click OK.<br />

The Save PPD File dialog box closes. The PPD and PPX files are<br />

generated.<br />

Editing Screening Settings<br />

To edit screening settings:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Create <strong>Trendsetter</strong> PPD File.<br />

The Save PPD File dialog box displays.<br />

2. Click the Configure button.<br />

The Configure PPD dialog box displays.<br />

3. Select a screening setting.<br />

4. Click the Edit button.<br />

The Configure Screening Settings dialog box displays.<br />

5. Edit the options as desired.<br />

6. Click OK.<br />

If the screening you defined already exists, a confirmation dialog box<br />

displays.<br />

7. Click Yes to continue. The confirmation dialog box closes.<br />

The Configure Screening Settings dialog box closes, and the Configure<br />

PPD dialog box displays.<br />

8. Click OK.<br />

The Configure PPD dialog box closes, and the Save PPD File dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

9. Click OK.<br />

The Save PPD File Confirmation dialog box displays.<br />

10. Click Yes to replace the screening settings in the PPD file. The dialog<br />

box closes.<br />

The Save PPD File dialog box closes. The screening settings you edited<br />

will be included in the next PPD file you generate.


Configuring PPD and PPX Files 135<br />

Deleting Screening Settings<br />

To delete screening settings:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Create <strong>Trendsetter</strong> PPD File.<br />

The Save PPD File dialog box displays.<br />

2. Click the Configure button.<br />

The Configure PPD dialog box displays.<br />

3. Select a screening setting.<br />

4. Click the Delete button.<br />

A confirmation dialog box displays.<br />

5. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.<br />

The screening setting is deleted from the Configure PPD dialog box.<br />

6. Click OK.<br />

The Configure PPD dialog box closes, and the Save PPD File dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

7. Click OK.<br />

The Save PPD File Confirmation dialog box displays.<br />

8. Click Yes to replace the screening settings in the PPD file. The dialog<br />

box closes.<br />

The Save PPD File dialog box closes. The screening setting you deleted<br />

will be excluded from the next PPD file you generate.


136 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Setting Up Custom Screening Angles<br />

Custom screening angles include all screening angle sets that are different<br />

from the predefined sets in the Configure Screening Settings dialog box.<br />

If you set up custom screening angles in the Configure Screening Settings<br />

dialog box, you must do one of two things:<br />

• If the angle set is 0°, 60°, 15°, 30°, you must change the Optimize for<br />

angle set box in the Harlequin Precision Screening Options dialog box<br />

to match these angles.<br />

• If any other angles are used, you must create a page feature and link the<br />

feature to the page setup that you will use to RIP the files with the<br />

custom angles. See Using Page Features below.<br />

Using Page Features<br />

If you created custom screening angles in the Configure PPD dialog box,<br />

you must create a page feature that matches the angles, so that when<br />

precision screening takes place—when the angles of the screens are<br />

optimized for best color results—Allegro RIP knows the angles you are<br />

using for color work, and it can screen them accurately, relative to each<br />

other.<br />

For example, if cyan is 15° and magenta is 75°, Allegro RIP attempts to<br />

calculate cyan as close to 15° as possible and magenta as close to 75° as<br />

possible, and then attempts to make the difference between cyan and<br />

magenta (75°–15° = 60°) as close to 60° as possible.<br />

If you are using color-specific calibration curves AND you are using<br />

screening angles other than those defined in HPS, you must change the<br />

order of the angles using a page feature. Allegro RIP uses the order in<br />

which the screening angles appear to determine the color of the separation.<br />

The order it recognizes is C,M,Y, then K. For example, if you define the<br />

angles as 75°, 0°, 45°, 15°, Allegro RIP recognizes the separation screened at<br />

75° as cyan, the 0° as magenta, etc.<br />

See also Configuring Page Features on page 149.


Configuring PPD and PPX Files 137<br />

Including Spot Functions<br />

By default, the PPD file includes four spot functions. When you configure<br />

the PPD file, you can add additional spot functions to the file.<br />

To add additional spot functions to the device-specific PPD file:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Create <strong>Trendsetter</strong> PPD File.<br />

The Save PPD File dialog box displays.<br />

2. Click the Configure button.<br />

The Configure PPD dialog box displays.<br />

3. From the Do not include in PPD file list under Spot Function<br />

Selection, select the spot function.<br />

4. Click the Include button.<br />

The spot function you selected is moved to the Include in PPD file list.<br />

5. Click OK.<br />

The Configure PPD dialog box closes, and the Save PPD File dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

6. Click OK.<br />

The Save PPD File Confirmation dialog box displays.<br />

7. Click Yes to replace the screening settings in the PPD file. The dialog<br />

box closes.<br />

The Save PPD File dialog box closes. The spot function you added will<br />

be included in the next PPD file you generate.<br />

Removing Spot Functions<br />

When you configure the PPD file, you can remove a spot function from the<br />

file.<br />

To remove a spot function from the device-specific PPD file:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Create <strong>Trendsetter</strong> PPD File.<br />

The Save PPD File dialog box displays.<br />

2. Click the Configure button.<br />

The Configure PPD dialog box displays.


138 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

3. From the Include in PPD file list under Spot Function Selection, select<br />

the spot function you want to remove.<br />

4. Click the Remove button.<br />

The spot function is moved to the Do not include in PPD file list.<br />

5. Click OK.<br />

The Configure PPD dialog box closes, and the Save PPD File dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

6. Click OK.<br />

The Save PPD File Confirmation dialog box displays.<br />

7. Click Yes to replace the screening settings in the PPD file. The dialog<br />

box closes.<br />

The Save PPD File dialog box closes. The spot function you removed<br />

will not be included in the next PPD file you generate.<br />

Viewing Spot Function Code<br />

To view spot function code:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Create <strong>Trendsetter</strong> PPD File.<br />

The Save PPD File dialog box displays.<br />

2. Click the Configure button.<br />

The Configure PPD dialog box displays.<br />

3. From the Include in PPD file list under Spot Function Selection, select<br />

the spot function for which you want to view the code.<br />

4. Click the View button.<br />

The Spot Function dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 80: Spot Function dialog box


Configuring PPD and PPX Files 139<br />

5. View the code, and click OK.<br />

The Spot Function dialog box closes, and the Configure PPD dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

6. Click OK.<br />

The Configure PPD dialog box closes, and the Save PPD File dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

7. Click OK.<br />

The Save PPD File Confirmation dialog box displays.<br />

8. Click Yes to replace the screening settings in the PPD file. The dialog<br />

box closes.<br />

The Save PPD File dialog box closes.<br />

Adding Custom Spot Functions<br />

By default, the PPD file includes four spot functions. When you configure<br />

the PPD file, you can create and add custom spot functions to the file.<br />

To create and add a custom spot function to the PPD file:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Create <strong>Trendsetter</strong> PPD File.<br />

The Save PPD File dialog box displays.<br />

2. Click the Configure button.<br />

The Configure PPD dialog box displays.<br />

3. Under Spot Function Selection, click the New button.<br />

The Spot Function dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 81: Spot Function dialog box<br />

4. In the Spot function name box, type a name for the custom spot<br />

function you want to add—for example, Diamond.


140 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

5. In the Spot function code box, type the PostScript code that describes<br />

the spot function.<br />

6. Click OK.<br />

The Spot Function dialog box closes, and the Configure PPD dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

7. Click OK.<br />

The Configure PPD dialog box closes, and the custom spot function is<br />

added to the PPD file. You must now add the spot function to Allegro<br />

RIP. See Adding a Custom Spot Function to Allegro RIP below.<br />

Adding a Custom Spot Function to Allegro RIP<br />

Once the name and the code for a custom spot function have been added<br />

to the PPD file, you must also add the name and code to Allegro RIP if you<br />

want to use the spot function in page setups and calibration curves.<br />

To add a custom spot function to Allegro RIP:<br />

1. Create a test file that uses the new spot function.<br />

You can create your own PostScript file that includes the spot function<br />

code, or you can impose an existing file, select the new spot function<br />

for the file (using the new PPD file), and print to PostScript.<br />

2. Submit the file to Allegro RIP.<br />

Note: Make sure the page setup used to RIP the file has the Override spot<br />

function check box cleared.<br />

3. Allegro RIP creates a subfolder for the spot function in the<br />

\allegro\sw\screens folder on the drive where Allegro RIP is installed,<br />

usually E:\.<br />

The subfolder is called sfxxxxx, where sf stands for spot function and<br />

xxxxx is a number assigned by Allegro RIP—for example, sf43518. By<br />

reading the spot function definition from the file, Allegro RIP creates<br />

the appropriate files in the sfxxxxx folder.<br />

4. Add the custom spot function to the screen names file.<br />

See Editing the Screen Names File on page 141.


Configuring PPD and PPX Files 141<br />

Editing the Screen Names File<br />

Once you have created a new spot function in the PPD file and submitted<br />

it to Allegro RIP, you must add the spot function to the screen names file.<br />

To edit the screen names file:<br />

1. On the drive where Allegro RIP is installed, usually E:, go to the<br />

\allegro\sw\screens folder.<br />

2. Open the sf.ps PostScript file.<br />

3. In the file, search for the PostScript code that defines your spot<br />

function.<br />

4. Immediately preceding that code is a number that matches the<br />

subfolder created in Allegro RIP—for example, sf43518.<br />

5. Write this number down.<br />

6. Go to the \allegro\sw\config folder.<br />

7. Using an editing program, such as Notepad, open the file called<br />

Screen Names.<br />

Folder name<br />

Spot function name<br />

Figure 82: Spot function names in screen names file<br />

8. Copy and paste an existing entry in the file.<br />

9. Make the following changes to the entry:<br />

• Change the InternalName to the number that matches the<br />

subfolder name—for example, sf43518.<br />

Note: Make sure that you change the name within the parenthesis.<br />

• Change the ExternalName to the spot function name that you<br />

created in the PPD file—for example, Diamond.<br />

Note: Make sure that you change the name within the parenthesis.<br />

• Make sure the Enabled line is set to true.


142 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

10. Save the Screen Name file.<br />

11. Restart <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>.<br />

Refer to Starting <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> on page 10 for instructions. Once<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> is restarted, Allegro RIP will display the spot<br />

function in the list of spot functions for screening setup and<br />

calibration curves.<br />

Deleting Custom Spot Functions<br />

To delete a custom spot function:<br />

1. From the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu, select Create <strong>Trendsetter</strong> PPD File.<br />

The Save PPD File dialog box displays.<br />

2. Click the Configure button.<br />

The Configure PPD dialog box displays.<br />

3. Select the custom spot function you want to delete.<br />

4. Click the Delete button.<br />

A confirmation dialog box displays.<br />

5. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.<br />

The confirmation dialog box closes, and the custom spot function is<br />

deleted. The Configure PPD dialog box displays.<br />

6. Click OK.<br />

The Configure PPD dialog box closes, and the Save PPD File dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

7. Click OK.<br />

The Save PPD File Confirmation dialog box displays.<br />

8. Click Yes to replace the spot function information in the PPD file. The<br />

dialog box closes.<br />

The Save PPD File dialog box closes.


Configuring PPD and PPX Files 143<br />

Making PPD and PPX Files Available to Your Imposition Software<br />

The PPD and PPX files must be available to your imposition workstation<br />

and your imposition software application. The procedure for making these<br />

files available differs, depending on which operating system your<br />

imposition software is running. This section explains the procedure for<br />

making the PPD file, and PPX file where applicable, available for the<br />

following:<br />

• Preps on a Macintosh workstation<br />

• desktop publishing applications, such as QuarkXPress, PageMaker,<br />

etc., on a Macintosh workstation<br />

• desktop publishing applications, such as QuarkXPress, PageMaker,<br />

etc., on a Windows 95 workstation<br />

• Preps 3.1e or earlier on a Windows 3.1, Windows 95, or Windows NT<br />

workstation<br />

• Preps 3.5 or later on a Windows 95 or Windows NT workstation<br />

Making PPD and PPX files Available to Preps (Mac)<br />

This section describes how to make PPD and PPX files available to Preps<br />

on a Macintosh computer.<br />

Copying the PPX file to the Preps \\ppd folder makes the virtual punch<br />

coordinate information available to Preps.<br />

To make the PPD and PPX files available to Preps:<br />

! Copy the PPD and PPX files to the preps\printers\ppd folder on each<br />

Mac workstation.<br />

The PPD and PPX files are available to Preps on your Macintosh<br />

workstation.


144 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Making PPD Files Available to Desktop Publishing Software<br />

(Mac)<br />

This section describes how to make a PPD file available to desktop<br />

publishing software that is running on a Macintosh computer.<br />

To make the PPD file available to desktop software:<br />

! Copy the PPD file to the system\printers folder on each Macintosh<br />

workstation.<br />

The PPD file is available to desktop publishing software on your<br />

Macintosh workstation.<br />

Making PPD Files Available to Desktop Publishing Software<br />

(PC)<br />

This section describes how to make a PPD file available to desktop<br />

publishing software that is running on Windows 95 on a PC computer.The<br />

Note: Adobe PostScript Driver must be installed on your Windows 95<br />

workstation before you can install the PPD file to that system. The Adobe<br />

PostScript Driver is not available for Windows NT; you cannot install a PPD file on<br />

a Windows NT workstation.<br />

To make the PPD file available to desktop software:<br />

1. Ensure that Adobe PostScript Driver is installed on your Windows 95<br />

workstation.<br />

Adobe PostScript Driver lets you install the PPD file to the<br />

Windows 95 system, making it available to desktop publishing<br />

software on that system. See your Windows 95 system documentation<br />

for details.<br />

2. Follow the Adobe PostScript Driver instructions for installing the<br />

PPD file.<br />

Refer to the Adobe PostScript Driver documentation for the<br />

instructions.<br />

Note: You cannot install the PPD file to a Windows 95 workstation without<br />

Adobe PostScript Driver.


Configuring PPD and PPX Files 145<br />

Making PPD Files Available to Preps 3.1e (PC)<br />

This section describes how to make PPD and PPX files available to Preps<br />

3.1e or earlier that is running on a Windows 3.1, Windows 95, Windows<br />

NT workstation.<br />

Copying the PPX file to the Preps \\ppd folder makes the virtual punch<br />

coordinate information available to Preps.<br />

To make the PPD and PPX files available to Preps 3.1e:<br />

! Copy the PPD and PPX files to the scenic\printers\ppd folder on each<br />

Windows 3.1, Windows 95, or Windows NT workstation.<br />

The PPD and PPX files are available to Preps 3.1e or earlier on your<br />

Windows 3.1, Windows 95, or Windows NT workstation.<br />

Making PPD Files Available to Preps 3.5 (PC) or Later<br />

This section describes how to make PPD and PPX files available to Preps<br />

3.5 that is running on a Windows 95 or a Windows NT workstation.<br />

Copying the PPX file to the Preps \\ppd folder makes the virtual punch<br />

coordinate information available to Preps.<br />

To make the PPD and PPX files available to Preps 3.5:<br />

! Copy the PPD and PPX files to the program files\scenicsoft\preps<br />

3.5\printers\ppd folder—or wherever Preps 3.5 is installed—on each<br />

Windows 95 or Windows NT workstation.<br />

The PPD and PPX files are available to Preps 3.5 on your Windows 95<br />

or Windows NT workstation.


146 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Reparsing the PPD File in Preps<br />

Preps parses the ppd folder on startup and saves the information in the<br />

ppd.psm file in the preps\printers folder. If the device-specific PPD file<br />

already exists in the preps\printers\ppd folder and you copy a new PPD file<br />

to this folder, the new PPD file overwrites the older file, but the ppd.psm<br />

file is NOT updated. The PPD file must be reparsed by Preps.<br />

To reparse the PPD file in Preps:<br />

1. Exit Preps.<br />

2. Copy the new device-specific PPD file to the preps\printers\ppd<br />

folder.<br />

3. Select the ppd.psm file from the preps\printers folder.<br />

4. On a Mac, drag the ppd.psm file to the trash folder.<br />

Or:<br />

In Windows, delete the ppd.psm file.<br />

5. Restart Preps.<br />

The PPD file is reparsed and the information is available.<br />

Determining Which Output Device the PPD File Is For<br />

Once the PPD file is available on your imposition workstation, in your<br />

imposition software, you must select the CreoScitex-developed output<br />

device you will use. If your shop has more than one CreoScitex output<br />

device, you can look in the PPD file to determine which output device the<br />

file was generated for.<br />

To determine the output device for which the PPD was generated:<br />

1. Open the PPD file in Notepad.<br />

2. In the PPD file, under *% General Information, the name of the<br />

output device is listed on the ModelName line.<br />

For example:<br />

*ModelName: "Creo <strong>Trendsetter</strong> []"<br />

You can find the in the pick list of available devices<br />

in:<br />

• Preps’ available device list—for example:


Configuring PPD and PPX Files 147<br />

Multiple<br />

CreoScitex<br />

output<br />

devices are<br />

available.<br />

The is listed<br />

here.<br />

Figure 83: Available device list in Preps<br />

Note: Preps reads the from the preps\printers\ppd<br />

folder.<br />

• desktop publishing applications, such as QuarkXPress, on a<br />

Macintosh—for example:<br />

CreoScitex output<br />

device<br />

The is listed<br />

here.<br />

Figure 84: Pick list of available devices in QuarkXPress<br />

Note: Desktop publishing applications read the from<br />

the Mac system folder.


148 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Setting Default Allegro RIP Settings in Desktop Publishing Applications<br />

Before you can set default Allegro RIP settings, you must make the<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> PPD file available to your desktop applications. Refer<br />

to the documentation you received with your desktop application for<br />

instructions on how to do this.<br />

This section gives an example of how to set default Allegro RIP settings<br />

using QuarkXPress 4.0.<br />

See also How Are PPD Files Used With Desktop Applications? on page 63.<br />

To set default Allegro RIP settings in QuarkXPress:<br />

1. Select Print from the File menu.<br />

The Print dialog box displays.<br />

2. Click the Printer button.<br />

The Printer dialog box displays.<br />

3. From the Destination box, select File to generate a PostScript file.<br />

4. From the General box, select Printer Specific Options.<br />

Four printer-specific options display: Resolution, MirrorPrint,<br />

NegativePrint, and Separations.<br />

5. Set the printer-specific options as desired.<br />

See also How Are PPD Files Used With Desktop Applications? on<br />

page 63.<br />

6. Click the Save Settings button to save the settings.<br />

7. Click the Save button.<br />

A dialog box displays to let you choose a destination for the PostScript<br />

file and specify a name for the PostScript file.<br />

8. Click the Save button.<br />

QuarkXPress generates a PostScript file that includes the settings you<br />

specified.


Configuring Page Features 149<br />

Configuring Page Features<br />

Creating a Page Feature<br />

A page feature is a fragment of PostScript code which is executed just<br />

before a job is run. The fragment specifies the changes to be made to the<br />

interpretation of that job, but is completely independent of it. It is used to<br />

apply a special effect to a job that is otherwise unavailable (for example, it<br />

cannot be achieved through any of the options in the Edit Page Setup<br />

dialog box).<br />

This section contains procedures for:<br />

• creating a page feature<br />

• modifying the Spectrum.ps proofing page feature<br />

• enabling a page feature<br />

To create a page feature:<br />

1. On the drive where Allegro RIP is installed, go to the allegro\sw\page<br />

features folder.<br />

2. Copy the following file to the same folder and rename it, so the name<br />

reflects the new screen angles:<br />

15750045<br />

For example, copy 15750045 and rename it 00601530. Make sure that<br />

the name is descriptive to you.<br />

3. Using a text editing program, such as Notepad, open the file you just<br />

created—for example, 00601530.<br />

4. Go to the following line in the file:<br />

<br />

Screen angles<br />

5. Change the screen angles, which are shown in the square brackets.<br />

6. Enable the page feature in the page setup that will be used to RIP the<br />

files with the custom screen angles.


150 Chapter 5 – System <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Modifying the Spectrum.ps Proofing Page Feature<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> contains a proofing page feature called Spectrum.ps.<br />

When enabled, the Spectrum.ps proofing page feature runs specific page<br />

features from the page features folder, plus the page features located in the<br />

allegro\sw\page features\spectrum subfolder. For a description of the<br />

Spectrum.ps proofing page feature, see What Is the Spectrum.ps Proofing<br />

Page Feature? on page 41.<br />

This section describes how to customize the Spectrum.ps proofing page<br />

feature by copying page features from the page features folder into the<br />

spectrum folder.<br />

To modify a proofing page feature:<br />

1. Using Windows NT Explorer, locate the allegro\sw\page features<br />

folder.<br />

Notice that the page features folder contains a spectrum subfolder.<br />

When selected from the Feature box in the Page Setup dialog box, the<br />

Spectrum.ps proofing page feature runs specific page features from the<br />

page features folder as well as any page features located in the<br />

spectrum subfolders.<br />

2. In the page features folder, select the page feature you want to add to<br />

the Spectrum.ps proofing page feature.<br />

3. Copy the page feature, and paste it into the spectrum subfolder.<br />

The Spectrum.ps proofing page feature will run the page feature you<br />

copied to the Spectrum subfolder.<br />

Enabling a Page Feature<br />

You can enable a page feature in a new page setup or in an existing page<br />

setup. See Enabling Page Features in Chapter .


6<br />

Job<br />

<strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Overview ........................................................................................152<br />

Configuring Separation Styles .........................................................153<br />

Managing Separation Styles ............................................................154<br />

Creating Separation Styles for Specific Workflows ...........................183<br />

Managing Page Setups ...................................................................203<br />

Configuring a Page Setup ...............................................................222<br />

Configuring Inputs..........................................................................240


152 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Overview<br />

Job-specific configuration includes:<br />

• creating separation styles<br />

• creating page setups<br />

• configuring input channels, for example, spool folders<br />

For each job type, you must configure an input and page setup. This<br />

chapter describes how to configure both.<br />

Before you begin configuring <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> for specific job types,<br />

you must configure the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> system. See Chapter 5, System<br />

<strong>Configuration</strong>.


Configuring Separation Styles 153<br />

Configuring Separation Styles<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> is shipped with sample separation styles. You can view<br />

the sample separation styles in the Separations Manager dialog box.<br />

You can use the sample separation styles in your page setups, edit them, or<br />

create new styles. Again, a single separation style can be used by more than<br />

one page setup. To create new separation styles, see Creating a New<br />

Separation Style on page 162.<br />

Table 11 lists the sample separation styles included with the software. It<br />

also describes the intended purpose of each separation style.<br />

Table 11: Color spaces used in typical workflows<br />

Input file type Output Color space Use<br />

Composite CMYK Separations CMYK to<br />

Monochrome<br />

Separated Separations Monochrome<br />

to<br />

Monochrome<br />

Pre-separated Separations Monochrome<br />

to<br />

Monochrome<br />

Page setups that<br />

process<br />

composite<br />

PostScript files<br />

Page setups that<br />

process<br />

separated<br />

PostScript files<br />

Page setups that<br />

process<br />

pre-separated<br />

PostScript files


154 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Managing Separation Styles<br />

Separation styles are managed in one central place, the Separations<br />

Manager dialog box.<br />

Separations Manager Dialog Box<br />

Separation styles are managed in the Separations Manager dialog box,<br />

which lists information about all existing separation styles, including:<br />

• corresponding output device<br />

• separation style name<br />

• color space<br />

• output format<br />

Use this dialog box to create a new separation style and to edit, copy, delete,<br />

or select an existing separation style.<br />

You access the Separations Manager dialog box in three ways:<br />

• Select Separations Manager from the Color menu.<br />

• Click the Separations Manager button on the toolbar.<br />

• Click the Separations Manager button in the Edit Page Setup dialog<br />

box.<br />

Lists separation<br />

styles with color<br />

space information<br />

(expected input and<br />

output format)<br />

Figure 85: Separations Manager dialog box


Managing Separation Styles 155<br />

The following options are available in the Separations Manager dialog box.<br />

Table 12: Separations Manager dialog box options<br />

Device box<br />

Edit button<br />

New button<br />

Copy button<br />

Delete button<br />

Select button<br />

Select <strong>Trendsetter</strong> to indicate you are using a<br />

device connected to <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>. See<br />

also Selecting a Device on page 156.<br />

Click to modify the selected separation style.<br />

This button launches the Edit Style dialog box—<br />

see page 156 for information about this dialog<br />

box.<br />

Note: This permanently changes the settings of the<br />

separation style.<br />

Click to create a new separation style from<br />

scratch and save it using a unique name.<br />

This button launches the New Style dialog<br />

box—see page 161 for information about this<br />

dialog box.<br />

Click to duplicate the selected separation style,<br />

modify the style, and save it under a new name.<br />

This button launches the New Style dialog<br />

box—see page 161 for information about this<br />

dialog box.<br />

Click the Copy button to use an existing<br />

separation style as a template for a new style. Do<br />

this if you want to keep the existing separation<br />

style but also want a similar style for a different<br />

purpose.<br />

Click to delete the selected separation style from<br />

the separations list.<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> doesn’t use this button.


156 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Selecting a Device<br />

To display the separation styles for a device, choose the device from the<br />

Device box. The separation styles are listed with their color space<br />

information (the expected input and output format).<br />

In addition to sending output to a <strong>Trendsetter</strong> output device, you can write<br />

output to a file in a specified format or preview the file on your screen. Use<br />

the following options for previewing a file and writing output to a file:<br />

• Preview<br />

Use to preview jobs in the Roam window. This device is available in<br />

both RIP-to-disk and RIP-to-plate mode.<br />

• None<br />

Doesn’t produce printed output but performs all the necessary<br />

processing for a job, including the production of page buffers. Use for<br />

testing and timing jobs.<br />

• TIFF<br />

Produces TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) files. Most desktop<br />

publishing applications can import this file format.<br />

Edit Style Dialog Box<br />

Use the Edit Style dialog box to modify a separation style. You access the<br />

Edit Style dialog box by clicking the Edit button in the Separations<br />

Manager dialog box.<br />

Note: Modifications made in this dialog box permanently change the settings of<br />

a separation style.


Managing Separation Styles 157<br />

Separations<br />

list<br />

Resolution<br />

and<br />

frequency<br />

list<br />

Figure 86: Edit Style dialog box—default settings<br />

The separations listed in the separations list apply to jobs that don’t specify<br />

their own separations; they are the default separation settings.<br />

The following options are available in the Edit Style dialog box.<br />

Table 13: Edit Style dialog box options<br />

Separations list<br />

Override separations<br />

in job check box<br />

• Lists the separations in the separation<br />

style, including spot colors (Separation<br />

column)<br />

• Indicates the desired output for each<br />

separation (Print column)<br />

• Determines the screen angle for each<br />

separation (Angle column)<br />

• Indicates the inking for each separation<br />

(Ink column)<br />

Select this box if you want Allegro RIP to<br />

override the separations defined in a job with<br />

the separations listed in the Edit Style dialog<br />

box.


158 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Use level 1 spot<br />

colors check box<br />

Override angles in<br />

job check box<br />

Reject preseparated<br />

jobs check box<br />

Recombine<br />

preseparated jobs<br />

check box<br />

Dot shape box<br />

Select this box if you want Allegro RIP to<br />

convert conventional representations of spot<br />

colors in PostScript Level 1 documents to the<br />

value specified in the PostScript Language<br />

compatibility level box in the Page Setup<br />

Options dialog box.<br />

By default, Allegro RIP converts the spot<br />

colors to PostScript Level 3. To convert the<br />

spot colors to PostScript Level 2, set the<br />

PostScript Language compatibility level box<br />

to 2.<br />

Select this box if you want Allegro RIP to use<br />

the screen angles in the separation style,<br />

instead of the angles supplied in a job.<br />

Select this box if you do not want Allegro RIP<br />

to process pre-separated jobs. If this box is<br />

selected, the Recombine preseparated jobs<br />

check box isn’t available.<br />

Select this box if you want Allegro RIP to<br />

recombine certain classes of pre-separated<br />

jobs. The output is composite CMYK.<br />

There are limitations to using the recombine<br />

feature. For example, Allegro RIP cannot<br />

output partial page buffers to disk when<br />

recombining a pre-separated job. The RIP<br />

must have enough memory to complete the<br />

entire job. It’s possible that Allegro RIP will<br />

require more random access memory (RAM)<br />

when using this feature. For more<br />

information, see Chapter 11, Color<br />

Separations in the Allegro RIP Reference<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

Select the dot shape to use when Allegro RIP<br />

overrides the dot shape supplied in a job.


Managing Separation Styles 159<br />

Override dot shape<br />

in job check box<br />

Resolution(s)<br />

column<br />

Frequency column<br />

Override frequency<br />

in job check box<br />

Generate extra gray<br />

levels check box<br />

Limit number of<br />

distinct gray levels<br />

to box<br />

Select this box if you want Allegro RIP to use<br />

the dot shape in the separation style, instead<br />

of the dot shape supplied in a job. For<br />

example, to use round dots, select Round<br />

from the Dot shape box and select the<br />

Override dot shape in job check box.<br />

Lists the resolution(s) available for the<br />

imaging head in your output device.<br />

To modify the resolution unit of<br />

measurement, click the row. The information<br />

appears in the Edit selected row line.<br />

Lists the line screen frequency.<br />

To modify the line frequency value and unit<br />

of measurement, click the row. The<br />

information appears in the Edit selected row<br />

line.<br />

Select this box if you want Allegro RIP to use<br />

the screening line frequency in the separation<br />

style, instead of the frequency supplied in the<br />

job.<br />

Select this box if you want Allegro RIP to<br />

generate extra gray levels. High-quality print<br />

requires at least 256 gray levels if the screens<br />

are calibrated for final output. The<br />

CreoScitex default is 1024.<br />

This check box is selected by default. Do not<br />

clear this check box.<br />

Select the maximum number of gray levels<br />

for high-quality print.<br />

The default is 1024. Do not change this value.


160 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Use Harlequin<br />

Precision Screening<br />

check box<br />

HPS Options button<br />

Select this box if you want Allegro RIP to use<br />

Harlequin Precision Screening (HPS). HPS is<br />

required for multicolor work and is advisable<br />

for all black and white printing.<br />

This check box is selected by default. Do not<br />

clear this check box.<br />

Click to display the Harlequin Precision<br />

Screening Options dialog box. You must<br />

modify the default settings in this dialog box.<br />

Following are the correct settings.<br />

For more information on Harlequin<br />

Precision Screening and screening in general,<br />

see the Chapter 6, Screening in the Allegro RIP<br />

Reference <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

Rotate screens<br />

according to page<br />

rotation check box<br />

This check box is selected by default. Do not<br />

clear this check box.


Managing Separation Styles 161<br />

New Style Dialog Box<br />

Use the New Style dialog box to create a new separation style. You access<br />

the New Style dialog box by clicking the New or Copy button in the<br />

Separations Manager dialog box.<br />

Figure 87: New Style dialog box<br />

The following options are available in the New Style dialog box.<br />

Table 14: New Style dialog box options<br />

Style name box<br />

Color space box<br />

Type a meaningful name for the new separation<br />

style. The name must be unique and can be up<br />

to 30 characters long.<br />

Select the color space of input files for the new<br />

separation style:<br />

• Monochrome<br />

• RGB<br />

• CMYK


162 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Output format box<br />

Create button<br />

Automatically displays the output format for<br />

the new separation style, based on the color<br />

space you selected.<br />

• If the color space is Monochrome, the output<br />

format is Monochrome.<br />

• If the color space is RGB, the output format is<br />

Separations.<br />

• If the color space is CMYK, the output format<br />

is Separations.<br />

Click to create the new separation style.<br />

See Creating a New Separation Style on page 162 for the complete<br />

procedure for creating a new style.<br />

Creating a New Separation Style<br />

To create a new separation style:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, Start Inputs has a check mark beside it. Click Start<br />

Inputs to select or deselect it.<br />

2. From the Color menu, select Separations Manager.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 88: Separations Manager dialog box


Managing Separation Styles 163<br />

3. In the Device box, select <strong>Trendsetter</strong>.<br />

For a list of other devices you can choose, see Separations Manager<br />

Dialog Box on page 154.<br />

4. Click the New button.<br />

The New Style dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 89: New Style dialog box<br />

5. In the Style name box, type a meaningful name for the new<br />

separation style.<br />

The style name must be unique and can be up to 30 characters long. If<br />

you enter the name of a style that already exists, a message displays.<br />

Figure 90: Unique separation style name message<br />

6. Click OK to return to the Style name box. Type a new name.


164 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

7. From the Color space box, select the color space of the input files for<br />

this workflow:<br />

• Monochrome<br />

• RGB<br />

• CMYK<br />

The Output format box automatically displays the output format for<br />

the new separation style, based on the color space you selected. For<br />

example, if you choose Monochrome in the Color space box, the<br />

Output format box defaults to Monochrome, and if you choose CMYK<br />

in the Color space box, the Output format box defaults to Separations.<br />

See Separation Styles in Chapter for more information on color space<br />

and achieving the results you want.<br />

8. Click the Create button.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box displays.<br />

Separation column<br />

Print column<br />

Figure 91: Edit Style dialog box<br />

9. To add the color separations you want Allegro RIP to generate to the<br />

Separation column, click the New button.<br />

a. To the right of the Edit selected row box, type the name of the<br />

color.


Managing Separation Styles 165<br />

Note: You must give the spot color the exact same name used in the<br />

job, including upper and lowercase characters, embedded space<br />

characters, and trailing suffixes.<br />

b. In the Print box, select Yes to print the separation.<br />

c. Type the angle.<br />

d. Select the ink.<br />

10. To edit a color separation, double-click it. The current data for that<br />

separation appears in the Edit selected row boxes, where it can be<br />

edited.<br />

Tip: CreoScitex recommends that you set the Print column for Other<br />

colors in job to No. If it is set to Yes, all the spot colors in the file will be<br />

output, including colors you may not want imaged.<br />

11. Device resolutions are listed individually with the appropriate<br />

resolution. To edit a resolution, double-click it.<br />

The corresponding data appears in the Edit selected row boxes and<br />

can be edited.<br />

12. Select the Generate extra gray levels check box.<br />

13. Ensure that the Limit number of distinct gray levels to box is set to<br />

1024.<br />

14. Select the Use Harlequin Precision Screening check box.<br />

15. Ensure that the Rotate screens according to page rotation check box<br />

is selected.<br />

This check box is selected by default. Do not clear this check box.<br />

16. Set the following as required for your workflow:<br />

• Override angles in job check box<br />

• Dot shape box<br />

• Override dot shape in job check box<br />

• Override frequency in job check box<br />

For information about these options, see page 156.<br />

17. Click the HPS Options button.


166 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

The Harlequin Precision Screening Options dialog box displays. You<br />

must modify the default settings in this dialog box, as indicated in the<br />

following steps.<br />

Figure 92: Harlequin Precision Screening Options dialog box—default<br />

settings<br />

18. Ensure that the Optimize for angle set box is set to 15.0, 75.0, 0.0,<br />

45.0.<br />

19. Ensure that the Snap angles to nearest 7.5 degrees check box is<br />

selected.<br />

20. In the Angle accuracy box, type 0.002.<br />

21. In the Frequency accuracy box, type 0.010.<br />

22. In the Zero degrees frequency adjustment box, type 8.00.<br />

23. In the Maximum frequency deviation box, type 5.00.<br />

24. Ensure that the Enable HPS <strong>2.0</strong> check box is selected.<br />

25. Select the Abort job if accuracy not achieved check box.<br />

26. Ensure that the Generate clear centered rosettes check box is<br />

selected.<br />

27. Click OK.<br />

The Harlequin Precision Screening Options dialog box closes and the<br />

Edit Style dialog box displays.<br />

28. Click OK.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box closes and the Separations Manager dialog<br />

box displays.


Managing Separation Styles 167<br />

29. Click OK.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box closes and the new separation<br />

style is saved.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the separation style will not be saved<br />

and your changes will be lost.<br />

Editing a Separation Style<br />

Edit a separation style when you want to permanently change the style<br />

settings.<br />

To edit a separation style:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, Start Inputs has a check mark beside it. Click Start<br />

Inputs to select or deselect it.<br />

2. From the Color menu, select Separations Manager.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 93: Separations Manager dialog box<br />

3. In the Device box, select <strong>Trendsetter</strong>.<br />

For a list of other devices you can choose, see Separations Manager<br />

Dialog Box on page 154.<br />

4. Select the separation style that you want to edit.<br />

5. Click the Edit button.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box displays.


168 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Figure 94: Edit Style dialog box<br />

6. Set the options in the dialog box as required.<br />

For more information about the options available, see Edit Style Dialog<br />

Box on page 156.<br />

7. Click OK.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box closes and the Separations Manager dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

8. Click OK.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box closes and the separation style is<br />

saved.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the separation style will not be saved<br />

and your changes will be lost.


Managing Separation Styles 169<br />

Copying a Separation Style<br />

Copy a separation style when you want to use an existing separation style<br />

as a template for a new style. Do this if you want to keep the existing<br />

separation style but you also want a similar style for a different purpose.<br />

To copy a separation style:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, Start Inputs has a check mark beside it. Click Start<br />

Inputs to select or deselect it.<br />

2. From the Color menu, select Separations Manager.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 95: Separations Manager dialog box<br />

3. In the Device box, select <strong>Trendsetter</strong>.<br />

For a list of other devices you can choose, see Separations Manager<br />

Dialog Box on page 154.<br />

4. Select the separation style that you want to copy.<br />

5. Click the Copy button.<br />

The New Style dialog box displays.


170 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Figure 96: New Style dialog box<br />

6. In the Style name box, type a meaningful name for the new<br />

separation style.<br />

The style name must be unique and can be up to 30 characters long. If<br />

you enter the name of a style that already exists, a message displays.<br />

Figure 97: Unique separation style name message<br />

7. Click OK to return to the Style name box. Type a new name.<br />

The Color space and Output format box defaults are based on the style<br />

you copied. You can’t change these settings when copying an existing<br />

style. If the Color space and Output format box defaults are incorrect,<br />

you must create a new style. To create a new style, see Creating a New<br />

Separation Style on page 162.<br />

8. Click the Create button.<br />

9. Set the options in the dialog box as required.<br />

For more information about the options available, see Edit Style Dialog<br />

Box on page 156.<br />

10. Click OK.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box closes and the Separations Manager dialog<br />

box displays, listing the new separation style.


Managing Separation Styles 171<br />

11. Click OK.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box closes and the separation style is<br />

saved.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the separation style will not be saved<br />

and your changes will be lost.<br />

Deleting a Separation Style<br />

To delete a separation style:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, the Start Inputs option has a check mark beside it.<br />

Click Start Inputs to deselect it.<br />

2. From the Color menu, select Separations Manager.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 98: Separations Manager dialog box<br />

3. In the Device box, select <strong>Trendsetter</strong>.<br />

For a list of other devices you can choose, see Separations Manager<br />

Dialog Box on page 154.<br />

4. Select the separation style that you want to delete.<br />

5. Click the Delete button.<br />

The style is deleted from the separations list.<br />

6. Click OK.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box closes and the separation style is<br />

permanently deleted without confirmation or warning.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the separation style will not be deleted.


172 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Controlling Separation Output<br />

You control whether colors are output through the separations list in the<br />

Edit Style dialog box. In the separations list, you specify the colors you<br />

want to output when you use a particular separation style. Based on the<br />

setting you choose, colors are turned on, turned off, or made conditional<br />

(not blank).<br />

Separation<br />

name box<br />

Output<br />

box<br />

Screen<br />

angle box<br />

Inking<br />

box<br />

Click to add a<br />

spot color<br />

Figure 99: Separations list in Edit Style dialog box<br />

Table 15: Rules for generating separation output<br />

Setting in Print<br />

column<br />

Yes<br />

No<br />

Not Blank<br />

Separation output<br />

A separation is generated.<br />

A separation isn’t generated.<br />

A separation is generated only for colors in the file—<br />

for example, C, M, Y, K, Other colors in job, or spot<br />

colors added using the New button)—with data. A<br />

separation isn’t generated for colors without data;<br />

that is, no blank plates are generated.<br />

Note: If Other colors in job is set to No in the Print column, spot colors are<br />

converted to process colors. If a spot color added to the separations list using the<br />

New button is set to No in the Print column, the spot color is not converted to<br />

a process color and isn’t output. If a spot color added to the list using the New<br />

button is set to Yes, the spot color is output.


Managing Separation Styles 173<br />

The separations specified in the Edit Style dialog box are used for jobs that<br />

do not specify their own separations. In other words, if the PostScript file<br />

doesn’t contain separation instructions, the separation instructions in the<br />

Edit Style dialog box are used to process the job.<br />

If a job does contain separation instructions, you must select the Override<br />

separations in job check box to use the separation instructions specified in<br />

the Edit Style dialog box instead.<br />

Turning off a Separation<br />

The following rules apply to color separations:<br />

• If a color separation is turned off, no output is generated for the<br />

separation.<br />

• If Other colors in job is turned off, all spot colors are converted to<br />

process colors.<br />

• If a spot color added to the separations list using the New button is<br />

turned off, no output is generated for the color and it isn’t converted to<br />

process.<br />

In RIP-to-plate mode, to remake one or more, but not all color separations<br />

in a composite PostScript file, turn off the color separations you don’t want<br />

to remake, then resubmit the PostScript file. Allegro RIP interprets the<br />

entire file, but images only the color separation(s) that are turned on.<br />

In RIP-to-disk mode, to remake a separation in a composite PostScript file,<br />

select the page buffer that you want to remake from the Held Queue in the<br />

Output Controller/Monitor window and drag it to the Active Queue. If the<br />

page buffer isn’t in the Held Queue, you have to resubmit the PostScript<br />

file.<br />

To turn off a separation:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, the Start Inputs option has a check mark beside it.<br />

Click Start Inputs to deselect it.<br />

2. From the Color menu, select Separations Manager.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box displays.


174 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Figure 100: Separations Manager dialog box<br />

3. In the Device box, select <strong>Trendsetter</strong>.<br />

For a list of other devices you can choose, see Separations Manager<br />

Dialog Box on page 154.<br />

4. Select the separation style for which you want to turn off a separation.<br />

5. Click the Edit button.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 101: Edit Style dialog box


Managing Separation Styles 175<br />

6. Click the row of the color you want to turn off.<br />

Information for that color displays to the right of Edit selected row.<br />

7. From the output box under the Print column, select No.<br />

8. Select the Override separations in job check box.<br />

9. Click OK.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box closes and the Separations Manager dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

10. Click OK.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box closes.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the separation style will not be saved<br />

and your changes will be lost.<br />

Turning on a Separation<br />

When a color is turned on, output for that separation is generated,<br />

regardless of whether color data exists in the PostScript file. All separations<br />

set to Yes in the Print column output on separate media.<br />

If a color added to the separations list using the New button is turned on,<br />

output is generated for the color.<br />

To turn on a separation:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, the Start Inputs option has a check mark beside it.<br />

Click Start Inputs to deselect it.<br />

2. From the Color menu, select Separations Manager.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 102: Separations Manager dialog box


176 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

3. In the Device box, select <strong>Trendsetter</strong>.<br />

For a list of other devices you can choose, see Separations Manager<br />

Dialog Box on page 154.<br />

4. Select the separation style for which you want to turn on a separation.<br />

5. Click the Edit button.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 103: Edit Style dialog box<br />

6. Click the row of the color you want to turn on.<br />

Information for that color displays to the right of Edit selected row.<br />

7. From the output box under the Print column, select Yes.<br />

8. Select the Override separations in job check box.<br />

9. Click OK.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box closes and the Separations Manager dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

10. Click OK.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box closes.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the separation style will not be saved<br />

and your changes will be lost.


Managing Separation Styles 177<br />

Generating a Separation As Required<br />

Set the Print column in the separations list to Not Blank to generate output<br />

only if color data exists in the PostScript file.<br />

To output a color only if color data exists in the PostScript file:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, the Start Inputs option has a check mark beside it.<br />

Click Start Inputs to deselect it.<br />

2. From the Color menu, select Separations Manager.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 104: Separations Manager dialog box<br />

3. In the Device box, select <strong>Trendsetter</strong>.<br />

For a list of other devices you can choose, see Separations Manager<br />

Dialog Box on page 154.<br />

4. Select the separation style for which you want to set output based on<br />

color data in the PostScript file.<br />

5. Click the Edit button.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box displays.


178 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Figure 105: Edit Style dialog box<br />

6. Click the row of the color for which you want to set output based on<br />

color data in the PostScript file.<br />

Information for that color displays to the right of Edit selected row.<br />

7. From the output box under the Print column, select Not Blank.<br />

Output for this color will be generated only if color data exists in the<br />

PostScript file.<br />

8. Select the Override separations in job check box.<br />

9. Click OK.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box closes and the Separations Manager dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

10. Click OK.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box closes.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the separation style will not be saved<br />

and your changes will be lost.


Managing Separation Styles 179<br />

Adding a Spot Color to the Separations List (Composite<br />

Workflow Only)<br />

If you want to output a specific spot color from a composite PostScript file,<br />

you must add a separation to the separations list. The name of the spot<br />

color in the separations list must match exactly the name of the spot color<br />

in the PostScript file, including uppercase and lowercase letters, embedded<br />

space characters, and trailing suffixes. Spot colors not specified in the<br />

separations list convert to CMYK during RIPing—that is, separate media<br />

aren’t produced for unspecified spot colors.<br />

To add a spot color to the separations list:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, the Start Inputs option has a check mark beside it.<br />

Click Start Inputs to deselect it.<br />

2. From the Color menu, select Separations Manager.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 106: Separations Manager dialog box<br />

3. In the Device box, select <strong>Trendsetter</strong>.<br />

For a list of other devices you can choose, see Separations Manager<br />

Dialog Box on page 154.<br />

4. Select the composite separation style to which you want to add a spot<br />

color.<br />

5. Click the Edit button.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box displays.


180 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Figure 107: Edit Style dialog box<br />

6. Click the New button under the separations list.<br />

The box to the right of Edit selected row becomes available.<br />

7. In the separation name box under the Separation column, type the<br />

name of the spot color.<br />

You must give the spot color the exact name that’s in the PostScript file,<br />

including uppercase and lowercase characters, embedded space<br />

characters, and trailing suffixes.<br />

Note: Spot color naming conventions vary among desktop publishing<br />

software applications. For example, Adobe Illustrator may use spot color<br />

name Pantone293CVC while QuarkXPress uses Pantone293CV for the same<br />

spot color. See your desktop publishing software documentation for details<br />

on spot color naming requirements.<br />

8. From the output box under the Print column, select Yes.<br />

9. In the screen angle box under the Angle column, type the angle you<br />

want.<br />

10. From the inking box under the Ink column, select Normal, Opaque, or<br />

Transparent to indicate how you want ink applied to the separation.<br />

11. Select the Override separations in job check box.


Managing Separation Styles 181<br />

12. Click OK.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box closes and the Separations Manager dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

13. Click OK.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box closes.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the separation style will not be saved<br />

and your changes will be lost.<br />

Changing the Separation Order (Composite Workflow<br />

Only)<br />

To change the separation order:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, the Start Inputs option has a check mark beside it.<br />

Click Start Inputs to deselect it.<br />

2. From the Color menu, select Separations Manager.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 108: Separations Manager dialog box<br />

3. In the Device box, select <strong>Trendsetter</strong>.<br />

For a list of other devices you can choose, see Separations Manager<br />

Dialog Box on page 154.<br />

4. Select the separation style you want to modify.<br />

5. Click the Edit button.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box displays.


182 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Figure 109: Edit Style dialog box<br />

6. Click a color to select it, then hold down the left mouse button. The<br />

cursor changes to a page icon. Drag the page icon to the desired<br />

position in the separations list, then release the mouse button.<br />

The color separation is moved to the new position and the order is<br />

changed.<br />

7. Select the Override separations in job check box.<br />

8. Click OK.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box closes and the Separations Manager dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

9. Click OK.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box closes.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the separation style will not be saved<br />

and your changes will be lost.


Creating Separation Styles for Specific Workflows 183<br />

Creating Separation Styles for Specific Workflows<br />

This section contains information about creating separation styles for<br />

specific workflows. It includes the following information:<br />

• separation style settings for common workflows<br />

• creating a separation style for separated workflows<br />

• creating a separation style for composite CMYK workflows<br />

• creating a separation style for rejecting pre-separated files submitted<br />

using composite page setups<br />

• creating a separation style for pre-separated workflows<br />

• creating a separation style for recombining pre-separated workflows


184 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Separation Style Settings for Common Workflows<br />

Table 16: Creating separation styles for specific workflows<br />

Table 16 lists the separation style options and overrides required in<br />

different workflows.<br />

Page setup<br />

Color space:<br />

separation<br />

style<br />

Options affected Output Workflow<br />

Composite<br />

(CMYK)<br />

CMYK to Mono<br />

Process and spot<br />

colors must be:<br />

added to the<br />

separations list<br />

(click the New<br />

button)<br />

set to Yes, No, or<br />

Not Blank in the<br />

Print column<br />

Monochrome<br />

separation<br />

Composite<br />

CMYK to<br />

output plates,<br />

film, or proofs<br />

Composite<br />

CMYK with<br />

spot colors to<br />

output plates,<br />

film, or proofs<br />

You can modify the<br />

separation order (by<br />

dragging and<br />

dropping).<br />

You must select the<br />

Use level 1 spot<br />

colors check box.<br />

Pre-separated<br />

and separated<br />

Note: The<br />

PostScript file<br />

contains color and<br />

spot angle<br />

frequencies.<br />

Mono to Mono<br />

You must clear the<br />

Override<br />

separations in job<br />

check box.<br />

You must clear the<br />

Use level 1 spot<br />

colors check box.<br />

You may select or<br />

clear the Override<br />

angles in job and<br />

Override frequency<br />

in job check boxes.<br />

Monochrome<br />

separation<br />

Separated<br />

plates, film, or<br />

proofs<br />

Note: Proof<br />

colors are reordered<br />

in<br />

RIP-to-disk<br />

mode.


Creating Separation Styles for Specific Workflows 185<br />

Page setup<br />

Color space:<br />

separation<br />

style<br />

Options affected Output Workflow<br />

Pre-separated<br />

using recombine<br />

Mono to Mono<br />

You must select the<br />

Override<br />

separations in job<br />

and Override<br />

angles in job check<br />

boxes.<br />

Note: The<br />

Recombine<br />

preseparated jobs<br />

check box is<br />

automatically<br />

selected when you<br />

select the Override<br />

angles in job check<br />

box.<br />

Composite<br />

grayscale<br />

The Allegro<br />

RIP recombine<br />

feature is<br />

severely<br />

limited in<br />

respect to<br />

memory, spot<br />

color names,<br />

and performance.<br />

Creating a Separation Style for Separated Workflows<br />

To create a separation style for separated workflows:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, Start Inputs has a check mark beside it. Click Start<br />

Inputs to select or deselect it.<br />

2. From the Color menu, select Separations Manager.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box displays.


186 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Figure 110: Separations Manager dialog box<br />

3. In the Device box, select <strong>Trendsetter</strong>.<br />

For a list of other devices you can choose, see Separations Manager<br />

Dialog Box on page 154.<br />

4. Click the New button.<br />

The New Style dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 111: New Style dialog box<br />

5. In the Style name box, type a meaningful name for the new<br />

separation style.<br />

The style name must be unique and can be up to 30 characters long. If<br />

you enter the name of a style that already exists, a message displays.


Creating Separation Styles for Specific Workflows 187<br />

Figure 112: Unique separation style name message<br />

6. Click OK to return to the Style name box. Type a new name.<br />

7. In the Color space box, select Monochrome.<br />

The Output format box defaults to Monochrome.<br />

See Separation Styles in Chapter for information about color space.<br />

8. Click the Create button.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 113: Edit Style dialog box<br />

9. Select the Gray separation row.<br />

Information for the Gray separation displays to the right of Edit<br />

selected row.<br />

10. From the output box under the Print column in the separations list,<br />

select Yes.


188 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

11. Clear the Override separations in job check box.<br />

12. Select the Generate extra gray levels check box.<br />

13. Ensure that the Limit number of distinct gray levels to box is set to<br />

1024.<br />

14. Select the Use Harlequin Precision Screening check box.<br />

15. Ensure that the Rotate screens according to page rotation check box<br />

is selected.<br />

This check box is selected by default. Do not clear this check box.<br />

16. Set the following as required for your workflow:<br />

• Override angles in job check box<br />

• Dot shape box<br />

• Override dot shape in job check box<br />

• Override frequency in job check box<br />

For information about these options, see page 156.<br />

17. Click OK.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box closes and the Separations Manager dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

18. Click OK.<br />

Attention: The Separations Manager dialog box closes and the new<br />

separation style is saved.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the separation style will not be saved<br />

and your changes will be lost.


Creating Separation Styles for Specific Workflows 189<br />

Creating a Separation Style for Composite CMYK Workflows<br />

When you use a page setup with a composite CMYK separation style, only<br />

CMYK separations will be output. Any spot color separations in the<br />

PostScript file will be converted to process colors. For CMYK plus spot<br />

color output, see Adding a Spot Color to the Separations List (Composite<br />

Workflow Only) on page 179. One plate or film will be output per CMYK<br />

separation color, and QuarkXPress traps will be preserved.<br />

You can turn the INRIP Level2 separator on or off in composite PostScript<br />

generated by Preps. The RIP processes the composite PostScript files<br />

according to the separation style (CMYK to separations) in either case. It’s<br />

important to use the Level 2 separator in Preps to ensure that Preps<br />

correctly processes Level 2 PostScript files.<br />

For more details, see your Preps documentation.<br />

To create a separation style for composite CMYK workflows:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, Start Inputs has a check mark beside it. Click Start<br />

Inputs to select or deselect it.<br />

2. From the Color menu, select Separations Manager.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 114: Separations Manager dialog box<br />

3. In the Device box, select <strong>Trendsetter</strong>.<br />

For a list of other devices you can choose, see Separations Manager<br />

Dialog Box on page 154.


190 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

4. Click the New button.<br />

The New Style dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 115: New Style dialog box<br />

5. In the Style name box, type a meaningful name for the new<br />

separation style.<br />

The style name must be unique and can be up to 30 characters long. If<br />

you enter the name of a style that already exists, a message displays.<br />

Figure 116: Unique separation style name message<br />

6. Click OK to return to the Style name box. Type a new name.<br />

7. In the Color space box, select CMYK.<br />

The Output format box defaults to Separations.<br />

See Separation Styles in Chapter for information about color space.<br />

8. Click the Create button.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box displays.


Creating Separation Styles for Specific Workflows 191<br />

Figure 117: Edit Style dialog box<br />

9. Select the Override separations in job check box.<br />

10. Select the Use level 1 spot colors check box.<br />

CreoScitex recommends that you keep this check box selected. This<br />

ensures that Allegro RIP recognizes level 1 spot colors in QuarkXPress<br />

PostScript and outputs separations according to the Other colors in<br />

job setting. If you want all spot colors in QuarkXPress PostScript to be<br />

converted to process colors, do not add the spot colors to the<br />

separations list and set the Print column for Other colors in job to No.<br />

11. Modify the settings in the separations list.<br />

To select a color, double-click the appropriate row. Information about<br />

the color displays to the right of Edit selected row.<br />

a. For all process colors, set the Print column to Yes to turn on<br />

printing.<br />

b. For Other colors in job in the separations list, set the Print column<br />

to No to convert spot colors to process. If set to Yes, Allegro RIP<br />

will output all the spot colors in a file, including spot colors you<br />

may not want imaged as a separation.


192 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

c. In the screen angle box under the Angle column, set the angles as<br />

required.<br />

d. From the inking box under the Ink column, select Normal.<br />

Normal is appropriate for all colors.<br />

12. Select the Generate extra gray levels check box.<br />

13. Ensure that the Limit number of distinct gray levels to box is set to<br />

1024.<br />

14. Select the Use Harlequin Precision Screening check box.<br />

15. Ensure that the Rotate screens according to page rotation check box<br />

is selected.<br />

This check box is selected by default. Do not clear this check box.<br />

16. Set the following as required for your workflow:<br />

• Override angles in job check box<br />

• Dot shape box<br />

• Override dot shape in job check box<br />

• Override frequency in job check box<br />

For information about these options, see page 156.<br />

17. Click the HPS Options button.<br />

The Harlequin Precision Screening Options dialog box displays. You<br />

must modify the default settings in this dialog box, as indicated in the<br />

following steps.<br />

Figure 118: Harlequin Precision Screening Options dialog box—default<br />

settings


Creating Separation Styles for Specific Workflows 193<br />

18. Ensure that the Optimize for angle set box is set to 15.0, 75.0, 0.0,<br />

45.0.<br />

19. Ensure that the Snap angles to nearest 7.5 degrees check box is<br />

selected.<br />

20. In the Angle accuracy box, type 0.002.<br />

21. In the Frequency accuracy box, type 0.010.<br />

22. In the Zero degrees frequency adjustment box, type 8.00.<br />

23. In the Maximum frequency deviation box, type 5.00.<br />

24. Ensure that the Enable HPS <strong>2.0</strong> check box is selected.<br />

25. Select the Abort job if accuracy not achieved check box.<br />

26. Ensure that the Generate clear centered rosettes check box is<br />

selected.<br />

27. Click OK.<br />

The Harlequin Precision Screening Options dialog box closes and the<br />

Edit Style dialog box displays.<br />

28. Click OK.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box closes and the Separations Manager dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

29. Click OK.<br />

Attention: The Separations Manager dialog box closes and the new separation<br />

style is saved.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the separation style will not be saved and<br />

your changes will be lost.


194 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Creating a Separation Style for Rejecting Pre-separated Files<br />

Submitted Using Composite Page Setups<br />

You need to create a separation style that will prevent Allegro RIP from<br />

interpreting pre-separated PostScript files submitted in error. Follow the<br />

procedure for creating a separation style for a composite workflow (starts<br />

on page 189), but in the Edit Style dialog box, select the Reject<br />

preseparated jobs check box.<br />

Reject<br />

pre-separated<br />

jobs check<br />

box<br />

Figure 119: Edit Style dialog box—Reject pre-separated jobs check box selected<br />

Creating a Separation Style for Pre-separated Workflows<br />

Use this separation style when you want to change the angles specified in a<br />

pre-separated PostScript file.<br />

To create a separation style for pre-separated workflows:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, Start Inputs has a check mark beside it. Click Start<br />

Inputs to select or deselect it.<br />

2. From the Color menu, select Separations Manager.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box displays.


Creating Separation Styles for Specific Workflows 195<br />

Figure 120: Separations Manager dialog box<br />

3. In the Device box, select <strong>Trendsetter</strong>.<br />

For a list of other devices you can choose, see Separations Manager<br />

Dialog Box on page 154.<br />

4. Click the New button.<br />

The New Style dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 121: New Style dialog box<br />

5. In the Style name box, type a meaningful name for the new<br />

separation style.<br />

The style name must be unique and can be up to 30 characters long. If<br />

you enter the name of a style that already exists, a message displays.


196 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Figure 122: Unique separation style name message<br />

6. Click OK to return to the Style name box. Type a new name.<br />

7. In the Color space box, select CMYK.<br />

The Output format box defaults to Separations.<br />

See Separation Styles in Chapter for information about color space.<br />

8. Click the Create button.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 123: Edit Style dialog box<br />

9. Modify the settings in the separations list.<br />

To select a color, double-click the appropriate row. Information about<br />

the color displays to the right of Edit selected row.<br />

a. For all colors and for Other colors in job in the separations list, set<br />

the Print column to Yes to turn on printing.


Creating Separation Styles for Specific Workflows 197<br />

b. In the screen angle box under the Angle column, set the angles as<br />

required.<br />

c. From the inking box under the Ink column, select Normal.<br />

Normal is appropriate for all colors.<br />

10. Select the Override angles in job check box.<br />

Allegro RIP will use the screen angles in the separation style, instead of<br />

the angles supplied in a job.<br />

11. Select the Generate extra gray levels check box.<br />

12. Ensure that the Limit number of distinct gray levels to box is set to<br />

1024.<br />

13. Select the Use Harlequin Precision Screening check box.<br />

14. Ensure that the Rotate screens according to page rotation check box<br />

is selected.<br />

This check box is selected by default. Do not clear this check box.<br />

15. Set the following as required for your workflow:<br />

• Override angles in job check box<br />

• Dot shape box<br />

• Override dot shape in job check box<br />

• Override frequency in job check box<br />

For information about these options, see page 156.<br />

16. Click the HPS Options button.<br />

The Harlequin Precision Screening Options dialog box displays. You<br />

must modify the default settings in this dialog box, as indicated in the<br />

following steps.


198 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Figure 124: Harlequin Precision Screening Options dialog box—default<br />

settings<br />

17. Ensure that the Optimize for angle set box is set to 15.0, 75.0, 0.0,<br />

45.0.<br />

18. Ensure that the Snap angles to nearest 7.5 degrees check box is<br />

selected.<br />

19. In the Angle accuracy box, type 0.002.<br />

20. In the Frequency accuracy box, type 0.010.<br />

21. In the Zero degrees frequency adjustment box, type 8.00.<br />

22. In the Maximum frequency deviation box, type 5.00.<br />

23. Ensure that the Enable HPS <strong>2.0</strong> check box is selected.<br />

24. Select the Abort job if accuracy not achieved check box.<br />

25. Ensure that the Generate clear centered rosettes check box is<br />

selected.<br />

26. Click OK.<br />

The Harlequin Precision Screening Options dialog box closes and the<br />

Edit Style dialog box displays.<br />

27. Click OK.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box closes and the Separations Manager dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

28. Click OK.<br />

Attention: The Separations Manager dialog box closes and the new<br />

separation style is saved.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the separation style will not be saved<br />

and your changes will be lost.


Creating Separation Styles for Specific Workflows 199<br />

Creating a Separation Style for Recombining a Pre-separated Workflow<br />

Allegro RIP uses recombining when the required output for a preseparated<br />

file with color separations is composite grayscale. Normally, preseparated<br />

files output a separation for each color in the file. Recombined<br />

pre-separated files result in composite grayscale output.<br />

Note: The pre-separated job must contain all the required separations in one file<br />

or AppleTalk connection. It isn’t possible to recombine jobs in which each<br />

separation is a different file.<br />

Attention: When using recombine, Allegro RIP can’t paint partial page buffers<br />

to disk when recombining a pre-separated job. The RIP must have enough<br />

memory to complete the entire job, so it’s possible that Allegro RIP will require<br />

more memory when using recombine.<br />

To create a separation style for recombining a pre-separated workflow:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, Start Inputs has a check mark beside it. Click Start<br />

Inputs to select or deselect it.<br />

2. From the Color menu, select Separations Manager.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 125: Separations Manager dialog box<br />

3. In the Device box, select <strong>Trendsetter</strong>.<br />

For a list of other devices you can choose, see Separations Manager<br />

Dialog Box on page 154.<br />

4. Click the New button.<br />

The New Style dialog box displays.


200 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Figure 126: New Style dialog box<br />

5. In the Style name box, type a meaningful name for the new<br />

separation style.<br />

The style name must be unique and can be up to 30 characters long. If<br />

you enter the name of a style that already exists, a message displays.<br />

Figure 127: Unique separation style name message<br />

6. Click OK to return to the Style name box. Type a new name.<br />

7. In the Color space box, select Monochrome.<br />

The Output format box defaults to Monochrome.<br />

See Separation Styles in Chapter for information about color space.<br />

8. Click the Create button.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box displays.


Creating Separation Styles for Specific Workflows 201<br />

Figure 128: Edit Style dialog box<br />

9. Select the Generate extra gray levels check box.<br />

10. Ensure that the Limit number of distinct gray levels to box is set to<br />

1024.<br />

11. Select the Use Harlequin Precision Screening check box.<br />

12. Ensure that the Rotate screens according to page rotation check box<br />

is selected.<br />

This check box is selected by default. Do not clear this check box.<br />

13. Set the following as required for your workflow:<br />

• Override angles in job check box<br />

• Dot shape box<br />

• Override dot shape in job check box<br />

• Override frequency in job check box<br />

For information about these options, see page 156.<br />

14. Click the HPS Options button.


202 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

The Harlequin Precision Screening Options dialog box displays. You<br />

must modify the default settings in this dialog box, as indicated in the<br />

following steps.<br />

Figure 129: Harlequin Precision Screening Options dialog box—default<br />

settings<br />

15. Ensure that the Optimize for angle set box is set to 15.0, 75.0, 0.0,<br />

45.0.<br />

16. Ensure that the Snap angles to nearest 7.5 degrees check box is<br />

selected.<br />

17. In the Angle accuracy box, type 0.002.<br />

18. In the Frequency accuracy box, type 0.010.<br />

19. In the Zero degrees frequency adjustment box, type 8.00.<br />

20. In the Maximum frequency deviation box, type 5.00.<br />

21. Ensure that the Enable HPS <strong>2.0</strong> check box is selected.<br />

22. Select the Abort job if accuracy not achieved check box.<br />

23. Ensure that the Generate clear centered rosettes check box is<br />

selected.<br />

24. Click OK.<br />

The Harlequin Precision Screening Options dialog box closes and the<br />

Edit Style dialog box displays.<br />

25. Click OK.<br />

The Edit Style dialog box closes and the Separations Manager dialog<br />

box displays.


Managing Page Setups 203<br />

26. Click OK.<br />

The Separations Manager dialog box closes and the new separation<br />

style is saved.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the separation style will not be saved<br />

and your changes will be lost.<br />

Managing Page Setups<br />

Page Setup Manager Dialog Box<br />

Page setups are managed in the Page Setup Manager dialog box, which lists<br />

information about all existing page setups, including:<br />

• page setup name<br />

• corresponding output device<br />

• output resolution<br />

• calibration<br />

• separation style<br />

You need different page setups for composite and separated workflows and<br />

for proofmaking and film-making/platemaking. Use the same basic<br />

procedure to create any page setup, except select different settings based on<br />

the input and desired output. See Creating a Page Setup on page 214 for<br />

details.<br />

Use the Page Setup Manager dialog box to create a new page setup and to<br />

edit, copy, or delete an existing page setup.<br />

You can access the Page Setup Manager dialog box in three ways:<br />

• Select Page Setup Manager from the Allegro RIP menu.<br />

• Click the Page Setup Manager button on the toolbar.<br />

• Type CTRL+s.


204 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

You must stop inputs in order to display the Page Setup Manager dialog<br />

box. You can stop inputs in two ways:<br />

• Ensure that Start Inputs is not selected on the Allegro RIP menu.<br />

(When selected, Start Inputs has a check mark beside it.)<br />

• Click the Stop Inputs button on the toolbar. (The Stop Inputs button<br />

has a red arrow and traffic lights.)<br />

Page setup list<br />

Figure 130: Page Setup Manager dialog box<br />

The following options are available in the Page Setup Manager dialog box.<br />

Table 17: Page Setup Manager dialog box options<br />

Page setup list<br />

Edit button<br />

New button<br />

Lists the page setups available.<br />

Click to modify the selected page setup.<br />

This button launches the Edit Page Setup<br />

dialog box—see page 205 for information<br />

about this dialog box.<br />

Note: This permanently changes the settings of<br />

the page setup.<br />

Click to create a new page setup from scratch<br />

and save it using a unique name.<br />

This button launches the New Page Setup<br />

dialog box—see page 205 for information<br />

about this dialog box.


Managing Page Setups 205<br />

Copy button<br />

Delete button<br />

Units box<br />

Click to duplicate the selected page setup,<br />

modify the page setup, and save it under a new<br />

name.<br />

This button launches the New Page Setup<br />

dialog box—see page 205 for information<br />

about this dialog box.<br />

Click the Copy button to use an existing page<br />

setup as a template for a new page setup. Do<br />

this if you want to keep the existing page setup<br />

but also want a similar page setup for a<br />

different purpose.<br />

Click to delete the selected page setup from the<br />

page setups list.<br />

Select the unit of measurement.<br />

If you have more page setups than can be displayed at one time in the Page<br />

Setup Manager dialog box, use the scroll bars to view additional page<br />

setups.<br />

Edit Page Setup and New Page Setup Dialog Boxes<br />

The options in the Edit Page Setup and New Page Setup dialog boxes are<br />

identical. You access the Edit Page Setup dialog box by clicking the Edit<br />

button in the Page Setup Manager dialog box. You access the New Page<br />

Setup dialog box by clicking the New or Copy button in the Page Setup<br />

Manager dialog box.<br />

Use the Edit Page Setup dialog box to modify a page setup.<br />

Note: Modifications made in this dialog box permanently change the settings of<br />

the page setup.


206 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Figure 131: Edit Page Setup dialog box<br />

Use the New Page Setup dialog box to create a new page setup.


Managing Page Setups 207<br />

Figure 132: New Page Setup dialog box<br />

The following options are available in the Edit Page Setup and New Page<br />

Setup dialog boxes.<br />

Table 18: Edit Page Setup and New Page Setup dialog box options<br />

Device box<br />

Resolution Vertical<br />

and Horizontal boxes<br />

Units box<br />

Override resolution<br />

in job check box<br />

Select <strong>Trendsetter</strong> to indicate that you are<br />

using a device connected to <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

<strong>Console</strong>. See also Selecting a Device on<br />

page 156.<br />

Select the vertical and horizontal resolution<br />

of the image: 1200, 1600, or 2400 dpi.<br />

Select the resolution unit of measurement.<br />

Select this box if you want Allegro RIP to use<br />

the resolutions in the page setup, instead of<br />

the resolutions specified in a job.


208 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Style box<br />

Import Separations<br />

Manager button<br />

Color Options<br />

button<br />

Select the separation style you want to use.<br />

Click to access the Separations Manager<br />

dialog box, where you can edit, create, copy,<br />

delete, or select separation styles. See<br />

Separations Manager Dialog Box on page 154<br />

for more information.<br />

Click to access the Color Options dialog box,<br />

where you can set the expected angles for<br />

color separations, trapping, black generation,<br />

and overprinting in the incoming PostScript<br />

file.<br />

Note: Not all color options are available for a<br />

separated workflow.


Managing Page Setups 209<br />

Medium Index box<br />

Enable Feature<br />

check box<br />

Calibration box<br />

Negative check box<br />

Type the page setup medium index number.<br />

The page setup medium index is applied only<br />

if a print setup is used for a job and the print<br />

setup is configured to use the page setup<br />

medium index. In all other instances,<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> overrides the page setup<br />

medium index and uses the medium index<br />

set in the plate type or print setup for the job.<br />

Select this box to turn on page features and<br />

access the list of available page features (in<br />

the box below the check box).<br />

A page feature is linked to a corresponding<br />

PostScript language file that is executed just<br />

before a job is run.<br />

Use page features only when directed to by a<br />

procedure in the <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> User<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

Select [Creo Calibration] to turn on tonal<br />

calibration. If calibration is turned on:<br />

• Allegro RIP uses a calibration curve from<br />

Harmony and converts the tints specified<br />

in the job to the calibrated tint required to<br />

adjust the size of imaged dots. Calibration<br />

is applied before screening.<br />

• Select the Abort if matching cal set not<br />

found, or if user-selected cal set does not<br />

match check box on the Page Setup<br />

Options dialog box. This ensures that jobs<br />

won’t output if the proper calibration isn’t<br />

achieved.<br />

Leave this box cleared; it does not apply to<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>.


210 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Mirrorprint check<br />

box<br />

Trim page check box<br />

Rotate box<br />

Page layout button<br />

Scaling<br />

% Vertical and<br />

% Horizontal boxes<br />

Accelerate button<br />

Options button<br />

Save As button<br />

Select this box to invert an image on media.<br />

Do not select this check box unless you want<br />

to invert an image.<br />

Note: Always select this check box when<br />

outputting digital halftone proofs.<br />

Leave this box cleared; it does not apply to<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>.<br />

Select the degree of rotation for jobs.<br />

This box is set to 0 by default. Do not change<br />

the default setting unless you are using the<br />

Preview RIP.<br />

Click to display the Page Layout dialog box.<br />

When imaging plates and film, the page<br />

height and width are set to the largest size<br />

that the output device can image. When<br />

imaging digital halftone proofs, the page<br />

height and width are set to the proofing<br />

media receptor size.<br />

Attention: Be careful if setting the options in<br />

this dialog box to anything other than the<br />

default zeroes; increasing the margins can result<br />

in clipping of data.<br />

Type the vertical and horizontal scaling<br />

percentages. Scaling for a page size can be<br />

either proportional or non-proportional.<br />

Note: Setting scaling to anything other than<br />

100% can cause screening artifacts and distort<br />

rosette patterns on pre-screened data. Do not<br />

use scaling for copydot or CEPS files.<br />

This button is not available; it does not apply<br />

to <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>.<br />

Click to display the Page Setup Options<br />

dialog box. See below for details on the<br />

options in this dialog box.<br />

Click to save a new page setup.


Managing Page Setups 211<br />

Page Setup Options Dialog Box<br />

Do not change the default settings for options on the Page Setup Options<br />

dialog box, unless advised to by a CreoScitex representative.<br />

For information about the options in this dialog box, see Chapter 5, Configuring<br />

Output Formats in the Allegro RIP Reference <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

Figure 133: Page Setup Options dialog box<br />

The following are the default settings in the Page Setup Options dialog box.<br />

Check boxes not included in Table 19 are cleared by default.


212 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Table 19: Page Setup Options dialog box—default settings<br />

PostScript<br />

Language<br />

compatibility level<br />

box<br />

Abort if matching<br />

cal set not found,<br />

or if user selected<br />

cal set does not<br />

match check box<br />

Abort the job if<br />

any fonts are<br />

missing check box<br />

Preserve<br />

monochrome and<br />

preseparated jobs<br />

check box<br />

3<br />

Note: You can choose 1 or 2 for PostScript Level 1<br />

or Level 2. Select 1 or 2 as needed for specific types<br />

of jobs.<br />

Selected<br />

Prevents Allegro RIP from printing jobs with<br />

an inappropriate calibration set. The<br />

calibration set is specified in the page setup.<br />

Selected<br />

Ensures that jobs abort if fonts aren’t available.<br />

Selected<br />

Automatically detects if a separated file is sent<br />

to Allegro RIP using a composite page setup by<br />

mistake and adjusts the output accordingly.<br />

The RIP detects the error, outputs the correct<br />

color separations as indicated in the incoming<br />

PostScript file, and doesn’t create blank<br />

separations.<br />

Naming Page Setups<br />

You can create as many different page setups as you need. For example, you<br />

might have one that uses CreoScitex calibration and one that doesn’t.<br />

You must name each page setup when you create it. Give each page setup a<br />

meaningful name, without being too specific about its contents. A<br />

meaningful name is important, because you choose the page setup to use<br />

by the name. However, don’t be too specific, because you can change the<br />

settings within a page setup without changing its name.


Managing Page Setups 213<br />

Default Page Setups<br />

Table 20: Default page setups<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> is installed with default page setups, which are listed<br />

in the Page Setup Manager dialog box. You can delete or modify the default<br />

page setups to suit your needs.<br />

Table 20 lists the default page setups, the separation style that’s included<br />

with each page setup, and with which output device you can use each page<br />

setup.<br />

Page setup<br />

name<br />

Separation<br />

style included<br />

Use page setup with<br />

output device system...<br />

Use page setup for...<br />

Plate-film<br />

composite<br />

Composite<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

VLF <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

Spectrum<br />

Processing composite PostScript<br />

files for output on film or plates<br />

Note: VLF <strong>Trendsetter</strong> systems do<br />

not image film.<br />

Plate-film<br />

separated<br />

Separated<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

VLF <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

Spectrum<br />

Processing separated PostScript<br />

files for output on film or plates<br />

Note: VLF <strong>Trendsetter</strong> systems do<br />

not image film.<br />

Proof<br />

composite<br />

Composite Spectrum Processing composite PostScript<br />

files for output on digital halftone<br />

proofing media<br />

Proof separated Separated Spectrum Processing separated PostScript<br />

files for output on digital halftone<br />

proofing media<br />

Proof preseparated<br />

Blueline<br />

composite<br />

Pre-separated Spectrum Processing pre-separated PostScript<br />

files for output on digital halftone<br />

proofing media<br />

Grayscale <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Processing composite PostScript<br />

files for output on thermal blueline<br />

media<br />

Note: This manual doesn’t contain<br />

information about using thermal<br />

blueline media. See your service<br />

representative for more information.


214 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Creating a Page Setup<br />

To create a page setup:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, the Start Inputs option has a check mark beside it.<br />

Click Start Inputs to deselect it.<br />

2. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Page Setup Manager.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 134: Page Setup Manager dialog box<br />

3. Click the New button.<br />

The New Page Setup dialog box displays.


Managing Page Setups 215<br />

Figure 135: New Page Setup dialog box<br />

4. Set the options as required.<br />

For information about the options, see page 205.<br />

5. Click Save As.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 136: Save Setup dialog box


216 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

6. In the Save As box, type a name for the page setup.<br />

Or:<br />

Select an existing page setup from the page setup list. A message<br />

displays, asking you to confirm the page setup overwrite.<br />

Figure 137: Overwrite existing page setup message<br />

7. Click Yes to confirm the page setup overwrite.<br />

If you click No, the Save Setup dialog box displays again so that you can<br />

choose another name.<br />

8. Click Save.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box closes and the Page Setup Manager dialog<br />

box displays, listing the new page setup.<br />

9. Click OK.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box closes and the new page setup is<br />

saved.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the page setup will not be saved and<br />

your changes will be lost.<br />

Editing a Page Setup<br />

Edit a page setup when you want to permanently change the page setup<br />

settings.<br />

To edit a page setup:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, the Start Inputs option has a check mark beside it.<br />

Click Start Inputs to deselect it.<br />

2. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Page Setup Manager.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box displays.


Managing Page Setups 217<br />

Figure 138: Page Setup Manager dialog box<br />

3. Select the page setup that you want to edit.<br />

4. Click the Edit button.<br />

The Edit Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 139: Edit Page Setup dialog box<br />

5. Set the options as required.<br />

For information about the options, see page 205.


218 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

6. Click OK.<br />

The Edit Page Setup dialog box closes and the Page Setup Manager<br />

dialog box displays.<br />

7. Click OK.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box closes and the page setup is saved.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the page setup will not be saved and<br />

your changes will be lost.<br />

Copying a Page Setup<br />

Copy a page setup when you want to use an existing page setup as a<br />

template for a new page setup. Do this if you want to keep the existing page<br />

setup but you also want a similar page setup for a different purpose.<br />

To copy a page setup:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, the Start Inputs option has a check mark beside it.<br />

Click Start Inputs to deselect it.<br />

2. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Page Setup Manager.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 140: Page Setup Manager dialog box<br />

3. Select the page setup that you want to copy.<br />

4. Click the Copy button.<br />

The New Page Setup dialog box displays.


Managing Page Setups 219<br />

Figure 141: New Page Setup dialog box<br />

5. Set the options as required.<br />

For information about the options, see page 205.<br />

6. Click Save As.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 142: Save Setup dialog box


220 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

7. In the Save As box, type a name for the page setup.<br />

Or:<br />

Select an existing page setup from the page setup list. A message<br />

displays, asking you to confirm the page setup overwrite.<br />

Figure 143: Overwrite existing page setup message<br />

8. Click Yes to confirm the page setup overwrite.<br />

If you click No, the Save Setup dialog box displays again so that you can<br />

choose another name.<br />

9. Click Save.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box closes and the Page Setup Manager dialog<br />

box displays, listing the new page setup.<br />

10. Click OK.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box closes and the new page setup is<br />

saved.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the page setup will not be saved and<br />

your changes will be lost.<br />

Deleting a Page Setup<br />

To delete a page setup:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, the Start Inputs option has a check mark beside it.<br />

Click Start Inputs to deselect it.<br />

2. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Page Setup Manager.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box displays.


Managing Page Setups 221<br />

Figure 144: Page Setup Manager dialog box<br />

3. Select the page setup that you want to delete.<br />

4. Click the Delete button.<br />

The page setup is removed from the page setup list.<br />

5. Click OK.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box closes and the page setup is<br />

permanently deleted without confirmation or warning.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the page setup will not be saved and<br />

your changes will be lost.<br />

Changing the Page Setup Order<br />

Page setups are listed in the same order in the Page Setup Manager, Print<br />

File, Proof Fonts, and Print Calibration dialog boxes. If you change the<br />

order in which page setups are listed in the Page Setup Manager dialog box,<br />

the order is also changed in the other dialog boxes.<br />

To change the page setup order:<br />

! In the Page Setup Manager dialog box, select the page setup(s) you<br />

want to reorder, then drag the selection to the required position.<br />

You can move page setups within the displayed page setup list only. Use<br />

the scroll bars to move up the list when dragging page setups up. The<br />

list scrolls down automatically when you move page setups down the<br />

list.


222 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Configuring a Page Setup<br />

This section contains the following procedures for configuring page<br />

setups:<br />

• selecting an output device<br />

• associating a separation style to a page setup<br />

• configuring color options<br />

• turning on calibration<br />

• configuring scaling<br />

• configuring page layout<br />

• configuring application-specific options<br />

• setting resolution<br />

• specifying a medium index number<br />

• enabling page features<br />

Selecting the Output Device<br />

To select the output device in a page setup:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, the Start Inputs option has a check mark beside it.<br />

Click Start Inputs to deselect it.<br />

2. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Page Setup Manager.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box displays.<br />

3. Select a page setup, then click the Edit button.<br />

The Edit Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

Or:<br />

Click the New button to create a new page setup.<br />

The New Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

For information about the options in the Edit Page Setup and New<br />

Page Setup dialog boxes, see page 205.


Managing Page Setups 223<br />

4. From the Device box, select <strong>Trendsetter</strong>.<br />

For a list of other devices you can choose, see Separations Manager<br />

Dialog Box on page 154.<br />

5. If you’re editing a page setup, skip this step.<br />

Or:<br />

If you’re creating a new page setup, in the New Page Setup dialog box,<br />

click Save As.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box displays.<br />

a. In the Save As box, type a name for the page setup.<br />

Or:<br />

Select an existing page setup from the page setup list. A message<br />

displays, asking you to confirm the page setup overwrite. Click Yes<br />

to confirm the page setup overwrite. If you click No, the Save Setup<br />

dialog box displays again so that you can choose another name.<br />

b. Click Save.<br />

6. Click OK.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box closes and the Page Setup Manager<br />

dialog box displays, listing the new page setup.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box closes and the page setup is saved.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the page setup will not be saved and<br />

your changes will be lost.<br />

Associating a Separation Style to a Page Setup<br />

To associate a separation style to a page setup, select the style name from<br />

the Style box on the New Page Setup or Edit Page Setup dialog box when<br />

you create or edit the page setup.<br />

Tip: To quickly associate a separation style to a page setup, click the Select<br />

button on the Separations Manager dialog box. The Select button is available<br />

only when you access the Separations Manager dialog box via the Edit Page<br />

Setup dialog box. It isn’t available when you access the Separations Manager<br />

dialog box via the Color menu, because no page setup is open.


224 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

If you opened the Separations Manager from the Edit Page Setup dialog<br />

box, you can save changes by clicking the Select button. The Select button<br />

also displays the selected style in the Edit Page Setup dialog box.<br />

Note: The auto detect feature of Allegro RIP is used when the input format is<br />

different than specified in the page setup. The RIP automatically detects when a<br />

separated file is sent to the RIP using a composite page setup by mistake and<br />

adjusts the output accordingly. The RIP detects the error, outputs the correct color<br />

separations as indicated in the incoming PostScript file, and doesn’t create blank<br />

separations. You can turn off automatic detection, although it’s turned on by<br />

default and is recommended.<br />

To associate a separation style to a page setup:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, the Start Inputs option has a check mark beside it.<br />

Click Start Inputs to deselect it.<br />

2. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Page Setup Manager.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box displays.<br />

3. Select a page setup, then click the Edit button.<br />

The Edit Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

Or:<br />

Click the New button to create a new page setup.<br />

The New Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

For information about the options in the Edit Page Setup and New<br />

Page Setup dialog boxes, see page 205.<br />

4. From the Style box, select the separation style that you want to<br />

associate to the page setup.<br />

5. If you’re editing a page setup, skip this step.<br />

Or:<br />

If you’re creating a new page setup, in the New Page Setup dialog box,<br />

click Save As.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box displays.


Managing Page Setups 225<br />

a. In the Save As box, type a name for the page setup.<br />

Or:<br />

Select an existing page setup from the page setup list. A message<br />

displays, asking you to confirm the page setup overwrite. Click Yes<br />

to confirm the page setup overwrite. If you click No, the Save Setup<br />

dialog box displays again so that you can choose another name.<br />

b. Click Save.<br />

6. Click OK.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box closes and the Page Setup Manager<br />

dialog box displays, listing the new page setup.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box closes and the page setup is saved.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the page setup will not be saved and<br />

your changes will be lost.<br />

Configuring Color Options<br />

The options in the Color Options dialog box set the expected angles for<br />

color separations, trapping, black generation, and overprinting in<br />

incoming PostScript jobs.<br />

Note: The black generation options and the settrap (Quark) option in the<br />

Trapping box are available only for a CMYK color space. The overprinting<br />

options are available for a CMYK or Monochrome color space.<br />

For detailed information about the overprint and black generation options in the<br />

Color Options dialog box, see Allegro RIP Reference <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

To configure color options in a page setup:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, the Start Inputs option has a check mark beside it.<br />

Click Start Inputs to deselect it.<br />

2. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Page Setup Manager.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box displays.<br />

3. Select a page setup, then click the Edit button.<br />

The Edit Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

Or:<br />

Click the New button to create a new page setup.


226 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

The New Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

For information about the options in the Edit Page Setup and New<br />

Page Setup dialog boxes, see page 205.<br />

4. Click the Color Options button.<br />

The Color Options dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 145: Color Options dialog box—options for a composite workflow<br />

Figure 146: Color Options dialog box—options for a separated workflow


Managing Page Setups 227<br />

5. Set the Color separation angles in job separation boxes to the<br />

expected values for the job.<br />

6. If you’re processing composite PostScript, from the Trapping box,<br />

select settrap (Quark).<br />

If you’re processing separated PostScript, skip this step.<br />

7. Select the Overprint process colors check box, and click OK.<br />

The Color Options dialog box closes and either the Edit Page Setup or<br />

New Page Setup dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

8. If you’re editing a page setup, skip this step.<br />

Or:<br />

If you’re creating a new page setup, in the New Page Setup dialog box,<br />

click Save As.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box displays.<br />

a. In the Save As box, type a name for the page setup.<br />

Or:<br />

Select an existing page setup from the page setup list. A message<br />

displays, asking you to confirm the page setup overwrite. Click Yes<br />

to confirm the page setup overwrite. If you click No, the Save Setup<br />

dialog box displays again so that you can choose another name.<br />

b. Click Save.<br />

9. Click OK.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box closes and the Page Setup Manager<br />

dialog box displays, listing the new page setup.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box closes and the page setup is saved.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the page setup will not be saved and<br />

your changes will be lost.


228 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Turning on Calibration<br />

Calibration is the process that Allegro RIP uses to apply a calibration curve<br />

to convert the tints specified in the digital file to the calibrated tints<br />

required to adjust the size of imaged dots. Calibration is applied before<br />

screening.<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> comes bundled with a calibration tool called<br />

Harmony. In Harmony, you create and save curves. In Allegro RIP, you<br />

turn calibration on to use those curves. When calibration is turned on in<br />

Allegro RIP, the RIP queries the Harmony database for curves that match:<br />

• parameters in the incoming PostScript file<br />

• overrides set in Allegro RIP<br />

Allegro RIP then applies the correct curve when it RIPs the file.<br />

To turn on calibration in a page setup:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, the Start Inputs option has a check mark beside it.<br />

Click Start Inputs to deselect it.<br />

2. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Page Setup Manager.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box displays.<br />

3. Select a page setup, then click the Edit button.<br />

The Edit Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

Or:<br />

Click the New button to create a new page setup.<br />

The New Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

For information about the options in the Edit Page Setup and New<br />

Page Setup dialog boxes, see page 205.<br />

4. From the Calibration box, select [Creo Calibration].<br />

Note: To turn off calibration, select None in this box.<br />

5. If you’re editing a page setup, skip this step.<br />

Or:<br />

If you’re creating a new page setup, in the New Page Setup dialog box,<br />

click Save As.


Managing Page Setups 229<br />

The Save Setup dialog box displays.<br />

a. In the Save As box, type a name for the page setup.<br />

Or:<br />

Select an existing page setup from the page setup list. A message<br />

displays, asking you to confirm the page setup overwrite. Click Yes<br />

to confirm the page setup overwrite. If you click No, the Save Setup<br />

dialog box displays again so that you can choose another name.<br />

b. Click Save.<br />

6. Click OK.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box closes and the Page Setup Manager<br />

dialog box displays, listing the new page setup.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box closes and the page setup is saved.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the page setup will not be saved and<br />

your changes will be lost.<br />

Configuring Scaling<br />

Scaling for a page size can be either proportional or non-proportional,<br />

changing the size uniformly or non-uniformly.<br />

Attention: Setting scaling to anything other than 100% can cause screening<br />

artifacts and distort rosette patterns on pre-screened data. Do not use scale for<br />

Copydot or CEPS files.<br />

To configure scaling in a page setup:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, the Start Inputs option has a check mark beside it.<br />

Click Start Inputs to deselect it.<br />

2. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Page Setup Manager.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box displays.<br />

3. Select a page setup, then click the Edit button.<br />

The Edit Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

Or:<br />

Click the New button to create a new page setup.


230 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

The New Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

For information about the options in the Edit Page Setup and New<br />

Page Setup dialog boxes, see page 205.<br />

4. Under Scaling, in the Vertical and Horizontal boxes, type the scaling<br />

percentage that you want.<br />

5. If you’re editing a page setup, skip this step.<br />

Or:<br />

If you’re creating a new page setup, in the New Page Setup dialog box,<br />

click Save As.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box displays.<br />

a. In the Save As box, type a name for the page setup.<br />

Or:<br />

Select an existing page setup from the page setup list. A message<br />

displays, asking you to confirm the page setup overwrite. Click Yes<br />

to confirm the page setup overwrite. If you click No, the Save Setup<br />

dialog box displays again so that you can choose another name.<br />

b. Click Save.<br />

6. Click OK.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box closes and the Page Setup Manager<br />

dialog box displays, listing the new page setup.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box closes and the page setup is saved.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the page setup will not be saved and<br />

your changes will be lost.<br />

Configuring Page Layout<br />

To configure the page layout in a page setup:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, the Start Inputs option has a check mark beside it.<br />

Click Start Inputs to deselect it.<br />

2. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Page Setup Manager.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box displays.


Managing Page Setups 231<br />

3. Select a page setup, then click the Edit button.<br />

The Edit Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

Or:<br />

Click the New button to create a new page setup.<br />

The New Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

For information about the options in the Edit Page Setup and New<br />

Page Setup dialog boxes, see page 205.<br />

4. Click the Page layout button.<br />

The Page Layout dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 147: Page Layout dialog box<br />

5. From the Page size box, select Other.<br />

6. Set the Page width and Page height boxes based on the maximum<br />

media that is supported on the output device you’re using.<br />

For film and plates on a <strong>Trendsetter</strong> 3244:<br />

• In the Page width box, type 32 and select inches.<br />

• In the Page height box, type 44.<br />

For digital halftone proofs:<br />

• In the Page width box, type 0 and select inches.<br />

• In the Page height box, type 0.


232 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

7. From the Select units box, select inches.<br />

8. Leave all the other options in the dialog box set to 0.00.<br />

9. Click OK.<br />

The Page Layout dialog box closes and either the Edit Page Setup or<br />

New Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

10. If you’re editing a page setup, skip this step.<br />

Or:<br />

If you’re creating a new page setup, in the New Page Setup dialog box,<br />

click Save As.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box displays.<br />

a. In the Save As box, type a name for the page setup.<br />

Or:<br />

Select an existing page setup from the page setup list. A message<br />

displays, asking you to confirm the page setup overwrite. Click Yes<br />

to confirm the page setup overwrite. If you click No, the Save Setup<br />

dialog box displays again so that you can choose another name.<br />

b. Click Save.<br />

11. Click OK.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box closes and the Page Setup Manager<br />

dialog box displays, listing the new page setup.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box closes and the page setup is saved.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the page setup will not be saved and<br />

your changes will be lost.


Managing Page Setups 233<br />

Configuring Application-Specific Options<br />

You can define page setup settings that tell Allegro RIP how to interpret<br />

application files (for example, QuarkXPress or Macromedia Freehand).<br />

To configure application-specific options in a page setup:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, the Start Inputs option has a check mark beside it.<br />

Click Start Inputs to deselect it.<br />

2. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Page Setup Manager.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box displays.<br />

3. Select a page setup, then click the Edit button.<br />

The Edit Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

Or:<br />

Click the New button to create a new page setup.<br />

The New Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

For information about the options in the Edit Page Setup and New<br />

Page Setup dialog boxes, see page 205.<br />

4. Click the Options button.<br />

The Page Setup Options dialog box displays. For information about<br />

the default settings in this dialog box, see page 211.<br />

Figure 148: Page Setup Options dialog box


234 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

5. Click the Extras button.<br />

The Page Setup Option Extras dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 149: Page Setup Option Extras dialog box<br />

6. Set the options as required.<br />

The options in this dialog box are described in the Allegro RIP Reference<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

7. Click OK.<br />

The Page Setup Option Extras dialog box closes and the Page Setup<br />

Options dialog box displays.<br />

8. Click OK.<br />

The Page Setup Options dialog box closes and the Page Setup Manager<br />

dialog box displays.<br />

9. If you’re editing a page setup, skip this step.<br />

Or:<br />

If you’re creating a new page setup, in the New Page Setup dialog box,<br />

click Save As.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box displays.


Managing Page Setups 235<br />

a. In the Save As box, type a name for the page setup.<br />

Or:<br />

Select an existing page setup from the page setup list. A message<br />

displays, asking you to confirm the page setup overwrite. Click Yes<br />

to confirm the page setup overwrite. If you click No, the Save Setup<br />

dialog box displays again so that you can choose another name.<br />

b. Click Save.<br />

10. Click OK.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box closes and the Page Setup Manager<br />

dialog box displays, listing the new page setup.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box closes and the page setup is saved.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the page setup will not be saved and<br />

your changes will be lost.<br />

Configuring Resolution<br />

To set the resolution in a page setup:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, the Start Inputs option has a check mark beside it.<br />

Click Start Inputs to deselect it.<br />

2. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Page Setup Manager.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box displays.<br />

3. Select a page setup, then click the Edit button.<br />

The Edit Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

Or:<br />

Click the New button to create a new page setup.<br />

The New Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

For information about the options in the Edit Page Setup and New<br />

Page Setup dialog boxes, see page 205.<br />

4. Under Resolution, from the Vertical and Horizontal boxes, select the<br />

vertical and horizontal resolution you want.<br />

5. From the Units box, select the unit of measurement for the<br />

resolutions.


236 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

6. Select the Override resolution in job check box if you want the page<br />

setup resolution to override the resolution defined in the job.<br />

7. If you’re editing a page setup, skip this step.<br />

Or:<br />

If you’re creating a new page setup, in the New Page Setup dialog box,<br />

click Save As.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box displays.<br />

a. In the Save As box, type a name for the page setup.<br />

Or:<br />

Select an existing page setup from the page setup list. A message<br />

displays, asking you to confirm the page setup overwrite. Click Yes<br />

to confirm the page setup overwrite. If you click No, the Save Setup<br />

dialog box displays again so that you can choose another name.<br />

b. Click Save.<br />

8. Click OK.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box closes and the Page Setup Manager<br />

dialog box displays, listing the new page setup.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box closes and the page setup is saved.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the page setup will not be saved and<br />

your changes will be lost.<br />

Specifying a Medium Index Number<br />

Each media type supported by your <strong>Trendsetter</strong> output device is assigned<br />

an arbitrary number called a medium index. Medium index numbers:<br />

• communicate media imaging information from <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> to<br />

your output device<br />

• are used to select a Harmony calibration curve<br />

For a list of qualified media and their medium index numbers, see the Allegro RIP<br />

Reference <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

To specify a medium index number:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, the Start Inputs option has a check mark beside it.<br />

Click Start Inputs to deselect it.


Managing Page Setups 237<br />

2. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Page Setup Manager.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box displays.<br />

3. Select a page setup, then click the Edit button.<br />

The Edit Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

Or:<br />

Click the New button to create a new page setup.<br />

The New Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

For information about the options in the Edit Page Setup and New<br />

Page Setup dialog boxes, see page 205.<br />

4. In the Medium Index box, type the medium index number that you<br />

want the page setup to use.<br />

5. If you’re editing a page setup, skip this step.<br />

Or:<br />

If you’re creating a new page setup, in the New Page Setup dialog box,<br />

click Save As.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box displays.<br />

a. In the Save As box, type a name for the page setup.<br />

Or:<br />

Select an existing page setup from the page setup list. A message<br />

displays, asking you to confirm the page setup overwrite. Click Yes<br />

to confirm the page setup overwrite. If you click No, the Save Setup<br />

dialog box displays again so that you can choose another name.<br />

b. Click Save.<br />

6. Click OK.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box closes and the Page Setup Manager<br />

dialog box displays, listing the new page setup.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box closes and the page setup is saved.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the page setup will not be saved and<br />

your changes will be lost.


238 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

Enabling Page Features<br />

Page features let you apply special effects that aren’t available in the Edit<br />

Page Setup dialog box to jobs. A page feature is linked to a corresponding<br />

PostScript file that is executed just before a job runs. For more information<br />

about page features, see Configuring Page Features in Chapter .<br />

To enable a page feature in a page setup:<br />

1. Ensure that Start Inputs in the Allegro RIP menu is not selected.<br />

When selected, the Start Inputs option has a check mark beside it.<br />

Click Start Inputs to deselect it.<br />

2. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Page Setup Manager.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box displays.<br />

3. Select a page setup, then click the Edit button.<br />

The Edit Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

Or:<br />

Click the New button to create a new page setup.<br />

The New Page Setup dialog box displays.<br />

For information about the options in the Edit Page Setup and New<br />

Page Setup dialog boxes, see page 205.


Managing Page Setups 239<br />

Page<br />

feature box<br />

Figure 150: Edit Page Setup dialog box—page feature list<br />

4. Select the Enable Feature check box, then select a page feature from<br />

the box.<br />

5. If you’re editing a page setup, skip this step.<br />

Or:<br />

If you’re creating a new page setup, in the New Page Setup dialog box,<br />

click Save As.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box displays.<br />

a. In the Save As box, type a name for the page setup.<br />

Or:<br />

Select an existing page setup from the page setup list. A message<br />

displays, asking you to confirm the page setup overwrite. Click Yes<br />

to confirm the page setup overwrite. If you click No, the Save Setup<br />

dialog box displays again so that you can choose another name.<br />

b. Click Save.


240 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

6. Click OK.<br />

The Save Setup dialog box closes and the Page Setup Manager<br />

dialog box displays, listing the new page setup.<br />

The Page Setup Manager dialog box closes and the page setup is saved.<br />

Tip: If you click the Cancel button, the page setup will not be saved and<br />

your changes will be lost.<br />

Configuring Inputs<br />

The Input Controller dialog box should remain open whenever<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> is running, so you can easily monitor jobs while they<br />

are being processed. If you do want to close the Input Controller, click the<br />

X in the top-right corner of the dialog box.<br />

Creating an Input<br />

To create an input:<br />

1. Create a page setup.<br />

See Creating a Page Setup on page 214.<br />

2. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Input Controller.<br />

The Input Controller dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 151: Input Controller dialog box<br />

3. Click the New button.<br />

The Input Channel Edit dialog box displays.


Configuring Inputs 241<br />

Figure 152: Input Channel Edit dialog box<br />

4. In the Name box, type a name for the input channel.<br />

The name should be meaningful to you (for example, workflow<br />

composite or workflow separated).<br />

5. From the Type box, select the input type.<br />

6. From the Page Setup box, select the page setup that you created in<br />

step 1.<br />

The page setup that you select will be used to RIP each file submitted<br />

to this input type.<br />

7. Select the Enabled check box to turn on the input channel.<br />

8. Click the Configure button.<br />

A configuration dialog box displays; the dialog box displayed depends<br />

on which type of input you selected in step 5. Figure 153 is an example<br />

of the Spool Folder <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box.<br />

Figure 153: Spool Folder <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box


242 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

9. Set the options in the configuration dialog box as required.<br />

For information about the Spool Folder <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box, see<br />

Chapter 4, <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> Reference. For information about other<br />

configuration dialog boxes, see the Allegro RIP Reference <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

10. Click OK.<br />

The configuration dialog box closes and the Input Channel Edit dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

11. Click OK.<br />

The Input Channel Edit dialog box closes, the Input Controller dialog<br />

box displays, and the input is created.<br />

Editing an Input<br />

To edit an input:<br />

1. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Input Controller.<br />

The Input Controller dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 154: Input Controller dialog box<br />

2. Under the Name column, select the input that you want to modify.<br />

3. Click the Edit button.<br />

The Input Channel Edit dialog box displays.


Configuring Inputs 243<br />

Figure 155: Input Channel Edit dialog box<br />

4. Edit the options as required.<br />

5. Click the Configure button.<br />

A configuration dialog box for the selected input type displays.<br />

6. Make changes as required.<br />

For details on the options, see the Allegro RIP Reference <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

7. Click OK.<br />

The configuration dialog box closes and the Input Channel Edit dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

8. Click OK.<br />

The Input Channel Edit dialog box closes, the Input Controller dialog<br />

box displays, and the input changes are applied.<br />

Copying an Input<br />

To copy an input:<br />

1. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Input Controller.<br />

The Input Controller dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 156: Input Controller dialog box<br />

2. Under the Name column, select the input that you want to copy.


244 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

3. Click the Copy button.<br />

The Input Channel Edit dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 157: Input Channel Edit dialog box<br />

4. In the Name box, type a new name for the input channel.<br />

5. Set the remaining options as required.<br />

6. Click the Configure button.<br />

A configuration dialog box for the selected input type displays.<br />

7. Make changes as required.<br />

For details on the options, see the Allegro RIP Reference <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

8. Click OK.<br />

The configuration dialog box closes and the Input Channel Edit dialog<br />

box displays.<br />

9. Click OK.<br />

The Input Channel Edit dialog box closes, the Input Controller dialog<br />

box displays, and the input changes are applied.


Configuring Inputs 245<br />

Deleting an Input<br />

To delete an input:<br />

1. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Input Controller.<br />

The Input Controller dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 158: Input Controller dialog box<br />

2. Under the Name column, select the input that you want to delete.<br />

3. Click the Delete button.<br />

The input channel is permanently deleted from the Input Controller<br />

dialog box.<br />

Turning an Input On or Off<br />

To turn an input on or off:<br />

1. From the Allegro RIP menu, select Input Controller.<br />

The Input Controller dialog box displays.<br />

Figure 159: Input Controller dialog box


246 Chapter 6 – Job <strong>Configuration</strong><br />

2. Under the Name column, select the input that you want to turn on or<br />

off.<br />

When the input is on, the Off button displays; when the input is off,<br />

the On button displays.<br />

3. Click the On button to turn an input on.<br />

Or:<br />

Click the Off button to turn an input off.<br />

On or Off displays in the Enabled column.


Glossary<br />

Active Queue<br />

Allegro RIP<br />

Allegro workstation<br />

CMYK<br />

CPU<br />

composite PostScript<br />

file<br />

Delete list box<br />

device-specific PPD<br />

file<br />

Disable Output<br />

check box<br />

drum<br />

error folder<br />

exposure head<br />

In the Output Controller/Monitor window, this is where page buffers wait to be<br />

sent to the output device for imaging.<br />

A software application that creates a rasterized image of a PostScript file.<br />

A high-speed computer running the Windows NT operating system and<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>. The computer provides the operator’s console, raster image<br />

processor (RIP), and system control. It is connected to a local area network<br />

(LAN) over which it receives PostScript files.<br />

Cyan, magenta, yellow, black. Printing colors for process color production.<br />

Central Processing Unit.<br />

A single PostScript file that is not divided into color separations. That is, color<br />

information is not divided into cyan, magenta, yellow, black, or spot colors. A<br />

composite PostScript file can be generated by both desktop publishing and<br />

imposition software. See also separated PostScript file and pre-separated<br />

PostScript file.<br />

In the Output Controller/Monitor window, the options in this box determine<br />

what <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> does with your files after they have been output to the<br />

output device.<br />

PostScript Printer Description file containing information on the parameters<br />

and options associated with a CreoScitex output device, such as a Platesetter<br />

3244.<br />

When this check box is selected in the Output Controller/Monitor window, page<br />

buffers remain in the Active Queue until you are ready to send them to the<br />

output device for imaging. When the Disable output check box is cleared, files<br />

are automatically sent to the output device for imaging.<br />

On a CreoScitex output device, this is the device onto which a plate or film is<br />

mounted for imaging by the laser.<br />

Location where <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> sends files that fail to be processed.<br />

See imaging head.


248 <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> <strong>Configuration</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

file<br />

file name of image<br />

Harmony<br />

Held Queue<br />

hot folder<br />

image<br />

imaging head<br />

imaging status field<br />

imposition<br />

Info button<br />

input method<br />

job<br />

laser exposure<br />

media type<br />

output<br />

An electronic text description of one or more images, using the PostScript<br />

language.<br />

In the Output Controller/Monitor window, this box contains the name of the file<br />

that is being imaged.<br />

CreoScitex-developed software that calibrates dot size for CreoScitex output<br />

devices to compensate for press dot gain.<br />

In the Output Controller/Monitor window, this is where files go once the output<br />

device images them on media.<br />

See spool folder.<br />

An electronic bitmap that is exposed onto a single plate. The output device<br />

receives images from the Allegro workstation and produces exposed,<br />

undeveloped plates.<br />

Located inside the output device, this uses a laser to write data to the media. Also<br />

called an exposure head.<br />

In the Output Controller/Monitor window, this displays the progress of the file<br />

that is currently being imaging at the output device.<br />

A means of arranging pages on the front and back of a press sheet to ensure the<br />

correct order after the printed sheet is folded and trimmed.<br />

In the Output Controller/Monitor window, this button allows you to view raster<br />

information, for example, resolution, size of output raster file, and medium<br />

index. You must select a file, then click the Info button to view this information.<br />

A channel used for communication between <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> and an<br />

imposition workstation. Also called input channel or input mechanism.<br />

The PostScript file or files submitted to the RIP for processing.<br />

Refers to the laser power value the imaging head should be set to for a particular<br />

plate type. See also plate type.<br />

Refers to the media vendor’s plate or film product. Media types are configured by<br />

a service representative during installation of your <strong>Trendsetter</strong> system.<br />

Any data that is transferred to another device, such as a laser printer, a video<br />

display, or a platesetter.


Glossary 249<br />

output device<br />

page buffer<br />

page imposition<br />

page setup<br />

PDF<br />

PDF<br />

plate<br />

plate type<br />

PostScript<br />

Any device that plots data to hard copy, such as a laser printer, a platesetter, or an<br />

analog or digital proofer.<br />

In Allegro RIP, a file on disk that is used to store a page of interpreted output<br />

before it is printed or previewed. Depending on the page buffer mode you run<br />

Allegro RIP in, page buffers can be either retained on disk to allow reprinting or<br />

deleted after printing to save space on your hard disk. Also called an interpreted<br />

raster image of a PostScript flat.<br />

The process of printing several pages onto one sheet of media to minimize the<br />

amount of trimming required.<br />

A collection of specifications for a page, including resolution and orientation.<br />

Adobe’s Portable Document Format.<br />

QuarkXPress’ Printer Description File.<br />

The physical medium upon which the image is exposed. A <strong>Trendsetter</strong> output<br />

device produces one exposed plate for every image it receives, then sends the<br />

plate to the processor.<br />

Refers to a particular size of a media type. See also media type.<br />

A page description language developed by Adobe Systems that is used to describe<br />

type and visual elements so that they can be output on devices with PostScript<br />

interpreters.<br />

Note: A PostScript file can also be created from an imposition software application.<br />

PostScript file<br />

PPD file<br />

PPX file<br />

pre-separated<br />

PostScript file<br />

A file written in a page description language created from a native application<br />

file.<br />

See device-specific PPD file.<br />

Similar to the device-specific PPD file. The PPX files is created automatically<br />

when you generate the PPD file. The PPX file contains virtual punch coordinate<br />

information that is used by Preps imposition software.<br />

A single PostScript file that contains color-separation information for cyan,<br />

magenta, yellow, black, and any additional spot colors. The color-separation<br />

information is coded inside the single-file PostScript file; it is not divided into a<br />

separate PostScript file for each color. A pre-separated PostScript file is typically<br />

generated by desktop publishing software such as QuarkXPress. See also<br />

separated PostScript file and composite PostScript file.


250 <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> <strong>Configuration</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Preps<br />

Proofsetter<br />

Spectrum<br />

raster<br />

recorder<br />

Remove button<br />

resolution<br />

RGB<br />

RIP<br />

roam<br />

Roam button<br />

screen angle<br />

screen frequency<br />

SCSI<br />

separated PostScript<br />

file<br />

An imposition software application.<br />

A semiautomatic computer-to-media device developed by CreoScitex that can<br />

image digital halftone proofs.<br />

A <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Spectrum system consists of:<br />

• the Allegro workstation, which runs Allegro RIP and <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

• the output device, which is the actual proofmaking device<br />

Digitized (bitmapped) images defined pixel by pixel in rows and columns. See<br />

also RIP.<br />

See output device.<br />

After selecting a file in the Active Queue or Held Queue of the Output<br />

Controller/Monitor window, you can click this button to delete the file.<br />

The degree of detail with which an image is reproduced, usually measured in<br />

dots per inch (dpi) or lines per inch (lpi). The higher the resolution, the greater<br />

the detail in which the image will be reproduced.<br />

Red, green, and blue color model used by computer monitors to display color.<br />

Raster Image Processor. Creates bitmap images from PostScript files, which are<br />

then sent to the output device for imaging.<br />

To preview interpreted jobs in the Output Controller/Monitor window.<br />

In the Active Queue or Held Queue of the Output Controller/Monitor window,<br />

you click this button to preview rasterized image data.<br />

The angle at which a halftone screen is set when making screened images for<br />

printing halftones. Proper screen angles are critical to minimizing moiré<br />

patterns.<br />

The density of dots on a halftone screen, commonly measured in lines per inch<br />

(lpi). Also called screen ruling or raster.<br />

Small Computer Serial Interface. This type of connection is used to send image<br />

data from the Allegro workstation to the output device.<br />

A PostScript file that has color information split into separate files—that is, one<br />

file for cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and any spot colors. A separated PostScript<br />

file is typically generated by imposition software such as Preps. See also<br />

composite PostScript file and pre-separated PostScript file.


Glossary 251<br />

separation<br />

SMP<br />

spool folder<br />

spot color<br />

status indicator<br />

submitting<br />

suspend condition<br />

thermal imaging<br />

head<br />

throughput<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> 3230<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> 3244<br />

Refers to a color or layer in a file. A separation can be compared to film; there is<br />

one film for each color. For example, a basic CMYK job will require four films,<br />

that is, four separations. Each spot color has its own film, that is, its own<br />

separation. If multiple black films exist for a job, then multiple black separations<br />

are created for the job. All separations for a job must be registered to each other.<br />

Symmetric Multi Processor.<br />

Independent folder where you can place jobs to be output to the output device.<br />

A color that requires a special ink. It cannot be created using process colors.<br />

In the Output Controller/Monitor window, this shows the status of the media as<br />

it is being exposed. When an image is being transferred, the status indicator<br />

illustrates the percentage of the imaging process that is complete. CTP with an X<br />

through it in the status indicator means an error condition exists.<br />

The process of putting a file in an input channel for imaging.<br />

A condition preventing the output device from continuing its current operation,<br />

for example, when there are problems with the system.<br />

CreoScitex’s imaging option that uses an infrared laser diode to image IRsensitive<br />

plates and film at high resolutions.<br />

The efficiency with which images are interpreted and produced.<br />

A semi-automatic computer-to-media device developed by CreoScitex that is<br />

capable of handling plates of up to 32" x 30". It can image either plates or film.<br />

A <strong>Trendsetter</strong> 3230 system consists of:<br />

• the Allegro workstation, which runs Allegro RIP and <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

• the output device, which is the actual plate- or film-making device<br />

A semiautomatic computer-to-media device developed by CreoScitex that is<br />

capable of handling plates of up to 32" x 44". It can image either plates or film.<br />

A <strong>Trendsetter</strong> 3244 system consists of:<br />

• the Allegro workstation, which runs Allegro RIP and <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

• the output device, which is the actual plate- or film-making device


252 <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> <strong>Configuration</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

Spectrum<br />

UPS<br />

VLF <strong>Trendsetter</strong><br />

workstation<br />

A semiautomatic computer-to-media device developed by CreoScitex that can<br />

image digital halftone proofs, plates, or film.<br />

A <strong>Trendsetter</strong> Spectrum system consists of:<br />

• the Allegro workstation, which runs Allegro RIP and <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

• the output device, which is the actual plate-, film-, or proofmaking device<br />

Uninterruptible Power Supply. A device used to supply power temporarily to the<br />

Allegro workstation during a power failure.<br />

A semiautomatic computer-to-media device developed by CreoScitex that is<br />

capable of handling plates larger than 32" x 44".<br />

A VLF <strong>Trendsetter</strong> system consists of:<br />

• the Allegro workstation, which runs Allegro RIP and <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

• the output device, which is the actual platemaking device<br />

See Allegro workstation.


Index<br />

A<br />

Abort Input Queue menu option, 23<br />

About Allegro RIP menu option, 15<br />

Add Medium Index to PPD, 47<br />

adding<br />

media sizes, 107, 112<br />

medium index to PPD file, 103<br />

plate types, 107<br />

proof types, 112<br />

Allegro RIP<br />

adding custom spot functions,<br />

140<br />

configuring, 122<br />

definition of, 3<br />

RIP-to-disk mode, 52<br />

RIP-to-plate mode, 52<br />

setting default settings in DTP<br />

software, 148<br />

Allegro RIP menu options, 13<br />

About Allegro RIP, 15<br />

Configure RIP, 13<br />

Device Manager, 14<br />

Executive, 15<br />

Input Controller, 14<br />

Language, 15<br />

Logo, 15<br />

Memory Statistics, 15<br />

Page Setup Manager, 13<br />

Print File, 13<br />

Quit, 15<br />

Start Inputs, 14<br />

Allegro window<br />

definition, 68<br />

usage, 68<br />

Allegro workstation, 4<br />

Alpha, 4<br />

AppleTalk inputs, 57<br />

attention symbol, xiv<br />

C<br />

calibration<br />

turning off in page setups, 228<br />

turning on in page setups, 228<br />

Calibration button, 24<br />

calibration curve, 3<br />

Calibration Manager menu option, 21<br />

Cassette Manager button, 24<br />

Cassette Manager menu option, 20<br />

changing where RIP-to-disk files are<br />

stored, 124<br />

Color menu options, 20<br />

Separations Manager, 20<br />

color options<br />

configuring in page setups, 225<br />

Color Setup Manager button, 24<br />

composite PostScript, 28<br />

definition, 28<br />

<strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box<br />

buttons described, 74<br />

options described, 73<br />

Configure PPD dialog box<br />

buttons described, 94<br />

options described, 87<br />

Configure Proof Color Mappings<br />

dialog box<br />

buttons described, 85<br />

options described, 84<br />

Configure RIP menu option, 13<br />

Configure Screening Settings dialog<br />

box, 91<br />

configuring<br />

Allegro RIP, 122<br />

fonts, 127<br />

inputs, 240<br />

jobs, for, 100<br />

manual proof eject, 104<br />

manual proof/plate selection, 103<br />

media types, 75, 105<br />

page features, 149<br />

plate types, 77, 107<br />

PPD files, 130<br />

proof color mappings, 84<br />

proof types, 80, 112<br />

RIP mode, 125<br />

screening, 87<br />

system, 100<br />

workstation software, 73, 102<br />

configuring inputs, 240<br />

conventions used in the manual, xiii<br />

Copy menu option, 16<br />

copying<br />

inputs, 243<br />

page setups, 218<br />

Create <strong>Trendsetter</strong> PPD File menu<br />

option, 19<br />

creating<br />

inputs, 240<br />

page features, 149<br />

PPD files, 131<br />

screening settings, 132<br />

custom screening angles<br />

setting up, 136<br />

custom spot functions<br />

adding to Allegro RIP, 140<br />

deleting, 142<br />

D<br />

data storage threshold on the hard disk<br />

setting, 122<br />

default page setups, 213<br />

default PPD file settings, 131<br />

definitions<br />

inputs, 57<br />

media types, 29<br />

medium index, 44<br />

page features, 40<br />

page setups, 36<br />

plate type, 31<br />

PostScript file types, 28<br />

PPD files, 61<br />

proof color mapping table, 48<br />

proof type, 31<br />

RIP-to-disk mode, 52<br />

RIP-to-plate mode, 54<br />

separations styles, 32<br />

start inputs, 59<br />

Delete box, 247<br />

Delete Fonts menu option, 22<br />

deleting<br />

custom spot functions, 142<br />

fonts, 129<br />

inputs, 245<br />

plate types, 111<br />

proof types, 116<br />

screening settings, 135


254 <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> <strong>Configuration</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

desktop<br />

setting default Allegro RIP<br />

settings, 148<br />

desktop applications<br />

PPD files, and, 63<br />

device color name, 48<br />

Device Manager button, 24<br />

Device Manager menu option, 14<br />

dialog boxes<br />

<strong>Configuration</strong>, 73<br />

Configure PPD, 87<br />

Configure Proof Color Mappings,<br />

84<br />

Configure Screening Settings, 91<br />

Media <strong>Configuration</strong>, 75<br />

Plate Definition, 76<br />

Plate Type Specifications, 77<br />

Proof Definition, 79<br />

Proof Type Specifications, 80<br />

Save PPD File, 86<br />

Disable output check box, 247<br />

disable outputs, 67<br />

E<br />

Edit menu options, 16<br />

Copy, 16<br />

Paste, 16<br />

Edit Page Setup dialog box, 205<br />

options, 207<br />

Edit Style dialog box, 156<br />

options, 157<br />

editing<br />

inputs, 242<br />

page setups, 216<br />

screening settings, 134<br />

Eject Proof menu option, 20<br />

enabling<br />

page features, 150<br />

excluding prefixes, 96<br />

Executive menu option, 15<br />

exiting <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> software,<br />

11<br />

F<br />

file, definition of, 7<br />

Filenames Prefix List, 96<br />

files<br />

storing on the hard disk, 122, 124<br />

fonts, 127<br />

configuring, 127<br />

deleting, 129<br />

installing, 127<br />

listing, 128<br />

Fonts menu options, 21<br />

Delete Fonts, 22<br />

Install Fonts, 22<br />

List Fonts, 22<br />

Proof Fonts, 22<br />

fonts used in the manual, xiii<br />

G<br />

Generate PPD dialog box<br />

buttons on the Spot Function<br />

Selection section described, 93<br />

H<br />

hard disk<br />

setting the data storage threshold,<br />

122<br />

Harlequin Dispersed Screening, 6<br />

Harmony<br />

definition of, 3<br />

Harmony menu option, 20<br />

HDS, 6<br />

Held Queue, 248<br />

I<br />

image, definition of, 7<br />

imaging status, 248<br />

important symbol, xiv<br />

imposition software, 31, 107, 112<br />

making PPD files available to, 143<br />

making PPX files available to, 143<br />

selecting output devices, 146<br />

Info button, 248<br />

Input Controller button, 25<br />

Input Controller menu option, 14<br />

Input Queue menu options, 22<br />

Abort Input Queue, 23<br />

Kill Current Job, 22<br />

Stop Input Queue, 22<br />

inputs<br />

AppleTalk, 57<br />

configuring, 240<br />

copying, 243<br />

creating, 240<br />

definition, 57<br />

deleting, 245<br />

editing, 242<br />

management of, 58<br />

NT pipe, 57<br />

serial ports, 58<br />

socket plugins, 58<br />

sockets, 57<br />

spool folders, 57<br />

start inputs, 59<br />

turning on or off, 245<br />

usage, 58<br />

Install Fonts menu option, 22<br />

installing fonts, 127<br />

Intel, 4<br />

J<br />

job-specific configuration, 100<br />

K<br />

Kill Current Job menu option, 22<br />

L<br />

LAN, 4<br />

Language menu option, 15<br />

licensing<br />

PrintLink, 104<br />

Staccato, 105<br />

List Fonts menu option, 22<br />

listing installed fonts, 128<br />

Load Carrier menu option, 19<br />

local area network, 4<br />

Logo menu option, 15<br />

lpi, 89<br />

M<br />

manual proof eject, configuring, 104<br />

Media <strong>Configuration</strong> dialog box<br />

buttons described, 75<br />

options described, 75<br />

Media <strong>Configuration</strong> menu option, 17<br />

Media Manager button, 25<br />

Media Manager menu option, 20<br />

Media Monitor menu option, 21


Index 255<br />

media size<br />

adding, 107, 112<br />

media types<br />

configuring, 75, 105<br />

definition, 29<br />

usage, 29<br />

media, definition of, 7<br />

medium index, 3<br />

adding to PostScript files, 46<br />

calibration curves, and, 44<br />

definition, 44<br />

Harmony, and, 44<br />

PPD files, and, 47<br />

selecting in page setups, 222, 236<br />

medium, definition of, 7<br />

Memory Statistics menu option, 15<br />

message log, 69<br />

modifying<br />

plate types, 108<br />

proof types, 114<br />

Spectrum.ps, 149, 150<br />

N<br />

new features, xii<br />

New Page Setup dialog box, 205<br />

options, 207<br />

New Style dialog box, 161<br />

options, 161<br />

NoClampClipping.ps, 41, 42<br />

nominal frequency<br />

displayed in Preps, 89<br />

note symbol, xiv<br />

NT pipe inputs, 57<br />

O<br />

Output Controller menu option, 21<br />

Output Controller/Monitor window<br />

active queue, 67<br />

definition, 66<br />

disable outputs, 67<br />

held queue, 67<br />

usage, 66<br />

output device<br />

selecting, 101<br />

selecting in imposition software,<br />

146<br />

selecting in page setups, 222<br />

Output menu options, 20<br />

Calibration Manager, 21<br />

Cassette Manager, 20<br />

Media Manager, 20<br />

Media Monitor, 21<br />

Output Controller, 21<br />

Print Calibration, 21<br />

OverMediumIndex.ps, 41, 47<br />

OverMirrorPrint.ps, 41<br />

overrides<br />

page setups, 37<br />

PostScript, 37<br />

P<br />

page features<br />

configuring, 149<br />

creating, 149<br />

definition, 40<br />

enabling, 150<br />

enabling in page setups, 238<br />

Spectrum.ps, 41<br />

usage, 41<br />

using, 136<br />

page layout<br />

configuring in page setups, 230<br />

Page Setup Manager button, 24<br />

Page Setup Manager dialog box<br />

options, 204<br />

Page Setup Manager menu option, 13<br />

Page Setup Options dialog box, 211<br />

default settings, 211<br />

page setup order, changing, 221<br />

page setups<br />

associating separation styles to,<br />

223<br />

configuring, 222<br />

configuring application-specific<br />

options, 233<br />

configuring color options, 225<br />

configuring page layout, 230<br />

configuring resolution, 235<br />

configuring scaling, 229<br />

copying, 218<br />

defaults, 213<br />

definition, 36<br />

editing, 216<br />

enabling page features, 238<br />

override hierarchy, 37<br />

selecting an output device, 222<br />

specifying the medium index, 222,<br />

236<br />

turning off calibration, 228<br />

turning on calibration, 228<br />

usage, 36<br />

Paste menu option, 16<br />

Plate Definition dialog box<br />

buttons described, 76<br />

options described, 76<br />

Plate Definition menu option, 18<br />

Plate Type Specifications dialog box<br />

buttons described, 78<br />

options described, 77<br />

plate types<br />

adding, 107<br />

configuring, 77, 107<br />

deleting, 111<br />

modifying, 108<br />

PPD files, and, 31<br />

usage, 31<br />

PostScript file types<br />

composite, 28<br />

pre-separated, 28<br />

separated, 28<br />

PPD File menu option, 19<br />

PPD files, 109, 111, 114, 115, 116<br />

adding custom spot functions to,<br />

139<br />

adding medium numbers to, 103<br />

configuring, 87, 130<br />

definition, 61<br />

desktop applications, and, 63<br />

generating, 65, 131<br />

imposition software, and, 62<br />

including spot functions, 137<br />

loading defaults, 131<br />

making available to imposition<br />

software, 143<br />

page features, and, 136<br />

removing spot functions, 137<br />

reparsing in Preps, 146<br />

screening configuration, 87<br />

screening settings, 132<br />

screening, custom, 136<br />

usage, 62<br />

PPX files, 61<br />

configuring, 130<br />

imposition software, and, 62


256 <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> <strong>Configuration</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

making available to imposition<br />

software, 143<br />

prefix list, 96<br />

Preps, reparsing PPD files, 146<br />

pre-separated PostScript, 28<br />

definition, 28<br />

Print Calibration button, 23<br />

Print Calibration menu option, 21<br />

Print File button, 23<br />

Print File menu option, 13<br />

PrintLink<br />

definition of, 5<br />

PrintLink licensing, 104<br />

Proof Color Mapping menu option,<br />

19<br />

proof color mapping table<br />

Allegro RIP, and, 50<br />

definition, 48<br />

device color, 50<br />

digital halftone proofing, 50<br />

usage, 50<br />

proof color mappings<br />

configuring, 84<br />

Proof Definition dialog box<br />

buttons described, 79<br />

options described, 79<br />

Proof Definition menu option, 18<br />

Proof Fonts menu option, 22<br />

Proof Type Specifications dialog box<br />

buttons described, 81<br />

options described, 80<br />

proof types<br />

adding, 112<br />

configuring, 80, 112<br />

definition, 31<br />

deleting, 116<br />

modifying, 114<br />

PPD files, and, 31<br />

usage, 31<br />

proof/plate selection, configuring, 103<br />

proofing page feature<br />

modifying, 149, 150<br />

Spectrum.ps, 41<br />

Q<br />

queues<br />

active, 67<br />

held, 67<br />

Quit menu option, 15<br />

R<br />

reference symbol, xv<br />

Remove button, 250<br />

Reset <strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu option, 19<br />

resolution<br />

configuring in page setups, 235<br />

RIP color name, 48<br />

RIP mode<br />

changing, 125<br />

comparing, 55<br />

configuring, 125<br />

RIP, definition of, 7<br />

RIP-to-disk mode, 52<br />

advantages, 53, 56<br />

definition, 52<br />

file storage, 124<br />

RIP-to-plate mode, 52<br />

advantages, 54, 56<br />

definition, 54<br />

Roam button, 250<br />

S<br />

Save PPD File dialog box<br />

buttons described, 86<br />

options described, 86<br />

saving<br />

PPD files, 131<br />

scaling<br />

configuring in page setups, 229<br />

screen names file<br />

editing, 141<br />

screening<br />

angles, 91<br />

configuring, 87<br />

creating settings, 132<br />

deleting settings, 135<br />

editing settings, 134<br />

lpi, 89<br />

screening angles, custom<br />

setting up, 136<br />

Scripts menu option, 19<br />

Select Cassette menu option, 17<br />

Select Device menu option, 17<br />

selecting<br />

measurement units, 102<br />

output device, 101<br />

separated PostScript, 28<br />

definition, 28<br />

separation order, changing, 181<br />

separation output, controlling, 172<br />

separation styles<br />

associating to page setups, 223<br />

separations<br />

generating as required, 177<br />

turning off, 173<br />

turning on, 175<br />

separations list<br />

adding spot colors to, 179<br />

Separations Manager button, 24<br />

Separations Manager dialog box, 154<br />

options, 155<br />

Separations Manager menu option, 20<br />

separations styles<br />

definition, 32<br />

usage, 35<br />

serial port inputs, 58<br />

setting<br />

default Allegro RIP settings, 148<br />

socket inputs, 57, 58<br />

software<br />

exiting, 11<br />

inputs, 240<br />

rebooting, 10<br />

restarting, 10<br />

starting, 10<br />

software menus, 12<br />

Spectrum.ps, 41<br />

modifying, 149, 150<br />

Spool folder<br />

excluding files from processing,<br />

96<br />

spool folder inputs, 57<br />

spot functions, 140<br />

including in PPD file, 137, 139<br />

removing from PPD file, 137<br />

viewing code, 138<br />

Staccato<br />

definition of, 6<br />

Staccato licensing, 105<br />

start inputs, 59<br />

definition, 59<br />

Start Inputs button, 23<br />

Start Inputs menu option, 14


Index 257<br />

starting <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> software,<br />

10<br />

Stop Input button, 23<br />

Stop Input Queue menu option, 22<br />

symbols used in the manual, xiv<br />

system<br />

components, 2<br />

system configuration, 100<br />

system overview<br />

Allegro RIP, 3<br />

Allegro workstation, 4<br />

Harmony, 3<br />

output device, 4<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong>, 3<br />

T<br />

terminology in this manual, 7<br />

terminology used in the manual, xiii<br />

tip symbol, xv<br />

tool bar<br />

Calibration button, 24<br />

Cassette Manager button, 24<br />

Color Setup Manager button, 24<br />

Device Manager button, 24<br />

Input Controller button, 25<br />

Media Manager button, 25<br />

Page Setup Manager button, 24<br />

Print Calibration button, 23<br />

Print File button, 23<br />

Separations Manager button, 24<br />

Start Inputs button, 23<br />

Stop Input button, 23<br />

toolbar, 23<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong><br />

components, 2<br />

definition of, 2, 3<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> software<br />

exiting, 11<br />

menus, 12<br />

rebooting, 10<br />

restarting, 10<br />

starting, 10<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> menu options, 16<br />

Create <strong>Trendsetter</strong> PPD File, 19<br />

Eject Proof, 20<br />

Harmony, 20<br />

Load Carrier, 19<br />

Media <strong>Configuration</strong>, 17<br />

Plate Definition, 18<br />

Proof Color Mapping, 19<br />

Proof Definition, 18<br />

Reset <strong>Trendsetter</strong>, 19<br />

Scripts, 19<br />

Select Cassette, 17<br />

Select Device, 17<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor, 17<br />

Unload Carrier, 19<br />

Workstation <strong>Configuration</strong>, 17<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor menu option, 17<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> Monitor window, 69<br />

definition, 69<br />

usage, 69<br />

<strong>Trendsetter</strong> output devices, listed, 4<br />

U<br />

unit of measurement<br />

selecting, 102<br />

Unload Carrier menu option, 19<br />

W<br />

workstation, 4<br />

Workstation <strong>Configuration</strong> menu<br />

option, 17<br />

workstation software<br />

configuring, 102<br />

exiting, 11<br />

inputs, 240<br />

rebooting, 10<br />

restarting, 10<br />

starting, 10<br />

workstation software menus, 12


258 <strong>Trendsetter</strong> <strong>Console</strong> <strong>Configuration</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>


www.creoscitex.com

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!